Sunteți pe pagina 1din 265

Installation and Operation Manual

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X

English, , Franais, Deutsch, Espaol, , and

Windows
October 2014

Blackmagic Studio Camera

English

35

Franais

68

Deutsch

101

Espaol

134

167

200

233

Welcome
Thank you for purchasing Blackmagic Studio Camera!
We are extremely excited to have designed the Blackmagic Studio Camera.
Ever since I was a teenager I have loved live production, its so exciting!
Traditionally cameras with talkback and tally were very expensive and
physically large, so hard to manage. We really wanted to solve this problem
by designing a more compact camera that included all the talkback, tally
and camera control features of physically much larger cameras.
Thats why the Blackmagic Studio Camera was developed. We wanted to
build a much smaller camera for portability, however normally small cameras
have small tiny screens. We did not want that. What we really wanted was a
much larger viewfinder! The result is Blackmagic Studio Camera, the smallest
broadcast camera but with a very large viewfinder thats wonderful to use!
Precise focus and framing are so easy with a viewfinder this large!
Of course you get tally indicators, talkback, massive built in battery and of
course a fantastic quality camera with flexible MFT lens mount. Its everything
you need in a complete package! You can plug in larger wind protected
microphones even with phantom power and the optical fiber is built in so you
can run your camera miles away from your switcher! If you need, you can even
add a HyperDeck Shuttle and use the camera for general production use!
We hope you use your new camera for some amazing live productions and
produce some fantastic looking work! We are extremely excited to see what
creative work you produce!

Grant Petty
CEO Blackmagic Design

Contents

Blackmagic Studio Camera

5 
Getting Started

19 
Using ATEM Software Control

Introducing Blackmagic Studio Camera 5

Introducing Camera Control 19

Attaching a Lens 7

Using Camera Control 20

Turning Your Camera On 7

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector 22

8 
Connections
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Left Side 8
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Right Side 9

10 
Studio Camera Settings

Synchronizing Settings  24

25 
Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol 25
Overview25
Assumptions25

Camera Settings 10

Blanking Encoding 25

Audio Settings 11

Message Grouping 25

Monitoring Settings 12
Studio Settings 13
Adjusting Settings 14
Additional Settings 15

16 
Camera Video Output
Connecting to Video Switchers 16
Connecting to Recorders 16

17 
Blackmagic Camera Utility
18 
Attaching Accessories
Sun Shade 18
Other Accessories 18

33 
Help
34 
Warranty

Getting Started

5 Getting Started
Introducing Blackmagic Studio Camera

Features
1. FRONT TALLY LIGHT
Indicates to the on-air talent which camera is currently "live". See page 12.
2. LANC REMOTE
2.5mm stereo jack for LANC remote control supports iris, zoom and focus control. See page 8.
3. AVIATION HEADPHONES
0.25" TRS connector for monitoring PGM and control room audio with aviation style headsets. See page 8.
4. HEADPHONES MICROPHONE INPUT
0.206" TRS connector for talking to the control room with aviation style headsets. See page 8.
5. AUDIO INPUTS
2 x 1/4" balanced XLR connectors for audio input. See page 8.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

PUSH

12V

10

6. OPTICAL INPUT/OUTPUT
Optical input and output allows cable runs of up to 28 miles. See page 9.
7. SDI OUT
SDI output for connecting to a switcher or other device. See page 9.
8. SDI IN
SDI input allows the camera operator to view the Program (PGM) output. See page 9.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

9. REFERENCE INPUT
Allows multiple cameras to be genlocked to a blackburst or tri-level reference signal. See page 9.
10. POWER
12 24V power input for power supply and battery charging. See page 9.

PUSH

6 Getting Started
PUSH

11

11. 10" LCD


Monitor live camera output or program output, or view the menu. See page 12.

12

12. REAR TALLY LIGHT


When lit it indicates to the camera operator that their camera is currently "live".
13. FOCUS BUTTON
Press once to auto focus or twice to display focus peaking on the LCD. See page 14.
14. IRIS BUTTON
Press once for auto exposure. See page 14.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

15. PUSH TO TALK BUTTON (PTT)


Press and HOLD to talk. Press twice in quick succession for hands free communication. Press again to
revert to the default behavior. See page 15.

22

16. PROGRAM (PGM) BUTTON


Press to toggle between live camera output and program output from a switcher control room. See page 15.
17. LOOK UP TABLE (LUT) BUTTON
Currently not implemented.

23

18. MENU NAVIGATION BUTTONS


Navigate the menu on the LCD. See page 15.
19. SET BUTTON
Use this button to confirm your menu selections. See page 15.
20. DISPLAY BUTTON
Press this button to toggle overlays on and off. See page 15.
21. MENU BUTTON
Access the menu on the LCD. See page 15.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

22. POWER BUTTON


Press the power button to turn on the Blackmagic Studio Camera. Press and hold the button to turn the
camera off. See pages 7 and 15.

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

23. USB CONNECTOR


USB Mini-B port for camera firmware updates. See page 17.

12V

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

7 Getting Started
Attaching a Lens
Getting started with your Blackmagic Studio Camera is as simple as attaching a lens and turning the
camera on. To remove the protective dust cap from the lens mount, hold down the locking button and
rotate the cap counterclockwise until it is released. We recommend you always turn off your Blackmagic
Camera prior to attaching or removing a lens.
3

PUSH

To attach a lens:

PUSH

Step 1. Align the dot on your lens with the dot on the camera mount. Many lenses have either a blue,
red or white dot or some other indicator.
Step 2. Twist the lens clockwise until it locks into place.
Step 3. To remove the lens, hold down the locking button, rotate the lens counterclockwise until its
dot or indicator reaches the 12 oclock position and gently remove.
When no lens is attached to the camera, the lens mount is exposed to dust and other debris so you'll
want to keep the dust cap on whenever possible.

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Attaching and removing a lens on Studio Camera.


SDI IN

REF

Turning Your Camera On


The Studio Camera has an internal battery that can be charged using the supplied power adapter.
The camera can be charged and operated while connected via external power and will switch between
power sources without any interruption.
Step 1. Press the power button below the LCD. The live camera image will appear on the LCD.

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

Use the supplied power adapter to charge the internal battery


and power the camera.

Step 2. Press and hold the power button to switch off the camera.

Connections

8 Connections
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Left Side
LANC Remote Control
The remote port on your camera is used to remotely control lens focus, iris and zoom adjustments when
using a compatible lens. The port is a 2.5 mm stereo jack using the standard LANC protocol.
Active MFT lenses allow you to control the zoom servo with a LANC controller. The following lenses are
currently supported:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S. Lens
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom OIS Lens
Olympus 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M.Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3 Lens

Headphones Output
For monitoring program and control room audio with aviation style headsets with "fixed wing" connectors.
Aviation headsets range from single ear models for use in studio environments to full size noise cancelling
models which are suitable for loud concerts or sporting events. Audio is taken from channel 15 and 16 of
the incoming SDI and optical fiber video. Channels 15 and 16 are rarely if ever used during production
and so are very suitable to serve for the audio talkback.

Headphones Microphone Input


For talking to the control room with aviation style headsets. Audio is embedded into channel 15 and 16
of the SDI and optical fiber output.

PUSH

Audio Inputs
3
2

PUSH

Two channels of professional balanced analog audio is supported via XLR connectors. Use the audio menu
to set the input levels for each channel. The inputs support both Mic level inputs and line level inputs
and the input type is also selected from the audio menu. Audio is embedded into Channel 1 and 2 of the
SDI stream.

9 Connections
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Right Side
Optical Input/Output
The optical fiber input and output uses industry standard LC connectors, supporting 3G-SDI on Studio
Camera HD, and 6G-SDI on Studio Camera 4K. Optical fiber cable is widely available because it's the
same cable used in computer networking. Optical fiber allows cable runs of up to 28 miles which is more
than enough for even the most demanding outside broadcast event. If both optical and SDI inputs are
connected, the output from the device which was connected first will be used.

SDI Out
Use the SDI Out connector to output 10-bit 4:2:2 video to professional SDI video equipment such as
routers, monitors, SDI capture devices and broadcast switchers. Blackmagic Studio Camera HD supports
3G-SDI, and Studio Camera 4K supports 12G-SDI.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

SDI In
The SDI input allows the camera operator to view the Program (PGM) output. Simply press the PGM
button to toggle between live camera output and Program output from a switcher control room. If
both optical and SDI inputs are connected, the output from the device which was connected first will
be used. If you're using the Studio Camera to record to a device such as the Blackmagic Hyperdeck
Shuttle, the output from the Hyperdeck can be connected to the SDI input so you can playback what
you have just recorded.

Reference Input

REF

This allows multiple cameras to be genlocked to a blackburst or tri-level reference signal. Genlocking
cameras to an external reference signal helps to prevent timing errors which may result in the picture
jumping when switching between different cameras.
12V

Power
Use the 12 24V power input for connecting your power supply and to charge the internal battery. When
the battery is fully charged it will power the camera for up to 4 hours on Studio Camera HD, and up to
3 hours on Studio Camera 4K .

Studio Camera Settings

10 Camera Settings
Camera Settings
To configure settings on your Blackmagic Studio Camera, press the MENU button.
Use the navigation buttons to highlight menus and use the SET button to confirm your selection.

Video Format
Select the video format you wish to output. A list of supported formats is on the left of the page.

Gain
Gain settings are helpful when you are shooting in low light conditions. The default setting is 0dB and
gain can be increased in 6dB increments up to 18dB.

White Balance
Six white balance presets are selectable for a variety of color temperature conditions.
3200K for tungsten light
4500K for fluorescent light
5000K, 5600K, 6500K and 7500K for a variety of daylight conditions.
Camera settings.

Shutter Speed

Supported Video Formats

Shutter Speed complements the ISO setting by regulating the amount of light on the sensor. There are
15 different shutter speeds available ranging from 1/50 sec to 1/2000 sec.

Studio Camera HD
and Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

Language

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

English is the default language. Additional languages such as Japanese, French, German, Russian,
Spanish, Chinese and Korean will be supported in the future.

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

Dynamic Range
Film
The film dynamic range setting on Studio Camera HD uses a log gamma curve to maximize the information
in your video signal. This helps you get the most out of color grading software, such as DaVinci Resolve.
Video
The video setting on Studio Camera HD and Studio Camera 4K uses the REC709 standard for high
definition video which is compatible with modern studio equipment.

11 Camera Settings
Audio Settings
To adjust audio input and audio monitoring settings on your Blackmagic Studio Camera, press the MENU
button and select the microphone icon to the left of the display.

Audio Input
Switches audio between using the camera's internal microphone and the XLR audio connectors.

Microphone Level
Microphone input adjusts the recording levels of the built in microphone. Move the audio slider left
or right to increase or decrease levels. Studio Camera has a built in stereo microphone. The built in
microphone records to audio channels 1 and 2 when no external audio source is connected.

Input Level
External audio connectors support audio at microphone level or line level. Select Line when connecting
external audioequipmentsuch as an audio mixer or amplifier.Select the Mic Low or Mic High setting
depending on the signal strength of your microphone. It's important to select the appropriate level to
avoid your external audio sounding almost inaudible or too hot and distorted.
Audio settings.

Set the external audio input levels by using the left and right arrows.

Ch 1 Input
Move the audio slider icon left or right to increase or decrease levels for channel 1. The external audio
input overrides the built in microphone and is output to audio channel 1.

Ch 2 Input
Move the audio slider icon left or right to increase or decrease levels for channel 2. The external audio
input overrides the built in microphone and is output to audio channel 2.

Phantom Power
Enable or disable phantom power for both external XLR inputs by navigating to the Audio menu and
selecting On or Off using the arrow buttons. Phantom power is a method for transmitting power through
microphone cables and it is best known as a convenient power source for condenser microphones.
Be sure to wait at least 10 seconds for Phantom power to discharge after disconnecting before plugging
in a self powered microphone. Older ribbon type microphones are not suitable for phantom power usage.
When the Line setting is selected, Phantom Power is disabled.

12 Camera Settings
Monitoring Settings
To adjust the display settings for the LCD, press the MENU button and select the monitor icon.

Brightness
Move the slider icon left or right to adjust brightness settings for the LCD. The default setting is 60%.

Zebra
Blackmagic Cameras have a zebra feature which gives an indication of exposure levels. Diagonal lines
will appear across any part of the video that exceeds the zebra exposure level.
Turn zebra on and select the desired zebra warning level by using the left and right arrows. The default
setting is medium.

Focus Peaking
Allows you to change the level of focus peaking. The settings include: off, low, medium and high. Adjust
this setting when you are using a very sharp lens and the whole image is peaking. The default setting
is medium.
Monitoring settings.

Tally Brightness
Changes the brightness of the front tally light. Settings include: low, medium and high. The default
setting is medium.

13 Camera Settings
Studio Settings
To adjust the display settings for the LCD, press the MENU button and select the headphones icon.

Camera Number
If you want your Studio Camera to receive tally signals from an ATEM switcher, you'll need to set the
camera number on your camera. This ensures the switcher sends the tally signal to the correct camera.
The camera number can be set to a value of 1-99. Default setting is 1.

Reference Source
Used to select the genlock source. The Studio Camera can lock to program SDI input or external genlock
source. If using an external genlock source, be aware that changing that source will most likely cause a
glitch as the camera locks to the new source.

Reference Timing
Allows you to manually adjust the reference timing on a line or pixel basis.

Headset Level
Studio settings.

Move the volume slider left or right to increase or decrease audio monitoring levels. The default setting
is 50%.

Headset Mic Level


Move the volume slider left or right to increase or decrease audio microphone input levels. The default
setting is 50%.

Program Mix
Changes the balance of camera sound to talkback sound. The headphones will output audio following
what is displayed on the LCD. For instance, if you are in camera view, camera audio is heard. And if you
are in program view, program audio is heard. The default setting is 0%.

14 Camera Settings
Adjusting Settings
Blackmagic Studio Camera supports electronic lens control, which allows you to adjust lens settings
such as aperture and auto focus. The focus peaking feature creates a green edge around the sharpest
parts of the image so you can easily confirm your focus. Focus peaking is only visible on the LCD and
does not affect the SDI output.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Focus Button

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

When using the Studio Camera with an auto focus lens press the FOCUS button for focus peaking or
auto focus. Press the FOCUS button once to auto focus. A quick double press of the FOCUS button
activates focus peaking.
When using a manual lens, press the FOCUS button once for focus peaking.

Press the FOCUS button once to auto focus. A quick double


press of the FOCUS button activates focus peaking.

Iris Button
When using video dynamic range settings, a single press of the IRIS button will set an average exposure
based on the highlights and shadows in your shot. When using film dynamic range settings, pressing
the IRIS button sets your exposure to accommodate the brightest highlight in your shot.
To set your aperture manually on Studio Camera press the up and down navigation buttons.

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Press the IRIS button for auto exposure or use the up and
down navigation controls for manual exposure.

DISPLAY

MENU

15 Camera Settings
Additional Settings
Push to Talk (PTT)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

When doing live production it's vital that camera operators can talk to the director and others within
the control room. Simply press and HOLD the button to begin talking. Press twice in quick succession
for hands free communication.
Press again to revert to the default behavior.
DISPLAY
MENU

Program (PGM)
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

The Studio Camera features settings like PTT and PGM which
are essential for live production.

It's sometimes important for camera operators to see the program output, rather than just the view from
their own camera. Press the button to toggle between live camera output and the program output from a
switcher control room. You can use either the SDI or optical input to connect your external video source.

Look Up Table (LUT)


Currently not implemented.

Left, Up, Down, Right


Use these buttons to navigate the menus.

Set
Use this button to confirm your menu selections.

Display
Toggles framing guides and battery remaining indicator overlays on and off on the LCD. Overlays are
not present on the SDI output.

Menu
Press this button to bring up the Menu and then use the arrow buttons to navigate.

Power
Press the power button to turn on the Blackmagic Studio Camera. Press and hold the button to turn
the camera off.

Camera Video Output

16 Camera Video Output


Connecting to Video Switchers
Blackmagic Studio Cameras output 10-bit 4:2:2 video so you can connect to broadcast switchers and
other SDI video equipment. Optical input and output means ATEM Camera Converters are not required
at the camera end.
You can easily view the Program (PGM) output from the switcher by connecting it to your Studio Camera's
SDI or optical fiber input.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Connect either SDI or optical cables from your Studio Camera


to a production switcher or other device.
REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

Connect the camera's SDI output to the HyperDeck's SDI


input and connect the HyperDeck's SDI output to the
camera's SDI input to view your recordings.

12V

Blackmagic Studio Camera also features a reference input which allows multiple cameras to be genlocked
to a blackburst or tri-level reference signal. Genlocking cameras, VTRs and other devices to an external
reference signal helps to eliminate timing errors which may result in the picture jumping when switching
between different sources.

Connecting to Recorders
If you simply wish to record your Studio Camera's output, you can connect the SDI output to the SDI input
of an SSD recorder such as the Blackmagic HyperDeck Shuttle. The SDI output from the HyperDeck can
then be connected to the Studio Camera's SDI input, so you can view your recordings on the camera's LCD.

Blackmagic Camera Utility

PUSH

17 Blackmagic Camera Utility


PUSH

How to Update Your Camera Software on Mac OS X


After downloading the Blackmagic Camera Utility software and unzipping the downloaded file, open
the resulting disk image to reveal its contents.
Launch the Blackmagic Camera Installer and follow the on screen instructions.

How to Update Your Camera Software on Windows


After downloading the Blackmagic Camera Utility software and unzipping the downloaded file,
you should see a Blackmagic Camera Utility folder containing this PDF manual and the Blackmagic
Camera Utility installer.
Double-click the installer and follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation.

How to Update the Camera Software


After installing the latest Blackmagic Camera Utility on your computer, connect a USB cable between
the computer and the camera. The Mini-B USB 2.0 port is located on the underside of the camera.

Blackmagic Camera Utility software.

Launch the Blackmagic Camera Utility and follow any on screen prompt to update the camera software.

The Mini-B USB 2.0 port is located on the underside


of the camera.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Attaching Accessories

18 Attaching Accessories
Sun Shade
The Studio Cameras include a foldable sun shade to shade the LCD in bright conditions and ensure
optimum viewing is possible at all times.
Step 1. Locate the 6 thumbscrews that are included with your Studio Camera.
Step 2. Align the holes in the sun shade with the camera's mounting points and screw in 2 thumbscrews
to the top and each side of the camera to firmly secure the sun shade.

Other Accessories
For studio use you might want to mount the camera on a pedestal and add rails for large broadcast lenses
and teleprompters. For outside broadcast your may want to attach microphones, external batteries, or
LANC remote controllers. The camera includes two 3/8 mounting points on the bottom, and ten 1/4
mounting points on the sides and the top. This means you have the flexibility to customize your rig for
any size production.

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

Using ATEM Software Control

19 Using ATEM Software Control


Introducing Camera Control
Your Blackmagic Studio Camera can be controlled from an ATEM switcher using the Camera Control
feature in ATEM Software Control. Clicking on the Camera button opens the camera control feature.
Settings such as iris, gain and focus are easily adjusted using compatible lenses, plus you can color
balance cameras and create unique looks using the DaVinci Resolve primary color corrector.
The ATEM switcher control works by broadcasting camera control packets via all the non down converted
SDI outputs of an ATEM switcher. So this means you can connect an SDI output of an ATEM switcher to your
camera's video input, your camera will detect the control packets in the SDI link and allow you to control
features in the camera itself. You can control your camera via both regular SDI or optical fiber SDI connections.

Connecting via SDI


Step 1. Connect your Blackmagic Studio Camera's SDI Out to any SDI In on the ATEM switcher.

ATEM Camera Control


PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

IN
2

HDMI IN

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

STEREO IN

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

HD

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

HD

PREVIEW

HD

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

PUSH

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

CH 1

CH 2

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

MULTI-VIEW

SDI OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

HD

Step 3. On your Blackmagic Studio Camera, press Menu. Navigate to Studio Settings>Camera
Number and set it to match the switcher input. For example, if studio camera 1 is connected to
Cam 1 on the ATEM switcher, the camera number must also be set to 1. This ensures tally is
sent to the correct camera.

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

OUT

SDI OUT

IN

PGM SDI

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

CH 1CH 1

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Connecting via Optical Fiber

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

Step 1. Connect your Blackmagic Studio Camera's Optical Out/In to the Optical Out/In on an ATEM
Studio Converter.

PRESS TO TALK

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

STEREO
IN
PUSH

HD

Connect your Blackmagic Studio Camera


to any of the ATEM switcher's SDI inputs.

HD

PUSH

CH 1

SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

Step 2. Connect any one of the ATEM switcher's SDI outputs, except down converted or multi view
outputs, to your Studio Camera's SDI In. Camera control signals are not sent via the multi view
and down converted SDI outputs.

REMOTE

LOCK TO TALK

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

REMOTE

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Connect multiple Blackmagic Studio Cameras


via optical fiber using an ATEM Studio Converter

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

IN

Step 42. Connect a suitable SDI out from ATEM Studio Converter to any SDI In on the ATEM switcher.
AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

OUT

Step 3. Connect any one of the ATEM switcher's SDI outputs, except down converted or multi view
outputs to ATEM Studio Converter's SDI In. Camera control signals are not sent via the multi view
and down converted SDI outputs.
SDI OUT

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

IN

OPTICAL OUT/IN

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Step 4. On your Blackmagic Studio Camera, press Menu. Navigate to Studio Settings>Camera Number
and set it to match the switcher input. For example, if studio camera 1 is connected to Cam 1
on the ATEM switcher, your camera number must also be set to 1. This ensures tally is sent to
the correct camera.
Open ATEM Software Control Preferences and set the switcher's button mapping to make sure you are
switching the right camera with correct tally. Now you have a video connection from the switcher to your
Blackmagic Studio Camera, you can also get the advantage of live tally indicators on your camera, as well as
being able to view the program feed of the switcher by pressing your cameras PGM button.

20 Using ATEM Software Control


Using Camera Control

Click on the settings icon to select


the Aux output for camera control.

Launch ATEM Software Control and click on the Camera button located at the bottom of the software
window. Youll see a row of labeled camera controllers containing tools to adjust and refine each
cameras image. The controllers are easy to use. Simply click the buttons using your mouse, or click
and drag to adjust.

Camera Control Selection


The button row at the top of the camera control page lets you select the camera number you would like
to control. If you have more cameras that fit onto the window size, or you are running the color corrector
window, then you can use these buttons to select between which camera you would like to control. If you
are using an Aux output for monitoring your camera control, pushing these buttons to change the camera
to control will also send that camera's video output to the Aux output setup in the switcher preferences.

Channel Status
The channel status at the top of each camera controller displays the camera label, On Air indicator and
lock button. Press the lock button to lock all the controls for a specific camera. When on air, the channel
status illuminates red and displays the On Air alert.

Color Wheel
Each camera controller displays the channel status so you
know which camera is on air. Use the color wheels to adjust
each YRGB channel's lift, gamma and gain settings.

The color wheel is a powerful feature of the DaVinci Resolve color corrector and used to make color
adjustments to each YRGB channels lift, gamma and gain settings. You can select which setting to adjust
by clicking on the three selection buttons above the color wheel.

Master Wheel
Use the master wheel below the color wheel to make contrast adjustments to all YRGB channels at once,
or luminance only for each lift, gamma or gain setting.

Reset Buttons
The reset button near the top right of each camera controller lets you easily choose color correction
settings to reset, copy or paste. Each color wheel also has its own reset button. Press to restore a setting
to its default state, or copy/paste a setting. Locked controllers are not affected by the Paste feature.

When applying Paste to all, a warning message will appear


asking you to confirm your action. This is so you dont
accidentally paste new settings to any unlocked cameras
that are currently on air.

The master reset button on the top right corner of the color corrector panel lets you reset lift, gamma and
gain color wheels plus Contrast, Hue, Saturation and Lum Mix settings. You can paste color correction
settings to camera controllers individually, or all cameras at once for a unified look. Iris, focus, coarse and
pedestal settings are not affected by the Paste feature. When applying Paste to all, a warning message
will appear asking you to confirm your action. This is so you dont accidentally paste new settings to any
unlocked cameras that are currently on air.

21 Using ATEM Software Control


Iris/Pedestal Control
The iris/pedestal control is located within the cross hairs of each camera controller. The control illuminates
red when its camera is on air.
To open or close the iris, drag the control up or down. Holding the shift key allows only iris adjustments.
To darken or lift the pedestal, drag the control left or right. Holding the command key on a Mac, or the
Control key on Windows, allows only pedestal adjustments.

Coarse Setting
The coarse setting is located to the left of the iris/pedestal control and is used to limit the iris range. This
feature helps you prevent over exposed images from going to air.
To set your coarse threshold, completely open the iris using the iris control, then drag the coarse setting
up or down to set optimum exposure. Now when you adjust the iris, the coarse threshold will prevent it
from going above optimum exposure.

Iris Indicator
The iris indicator is located to the right of the iris/pedestal control and displays a visual reference
so you can easily see how open or closed the lens aperture is. The iris indicator is affected by the
coarse setting.
The iris/pedestal control illuminates red
when its respective camera is on air.

Auto Focus Button


The auto focus button is located at the bottom left corner of each camera controller. Press to automatically
set the focus when you have an active lens that supports electronic focus adjustments. It's important to
know that while most lenses support electronic focus, some lenses can be set to manual or auto focus
modes, and so you need to ensure your lens is set to auto focus mode. Sometimes this is set by sliding
the focus ring on the lens forward or backward.

Manual Focus Adjustment


When you want to adjust the focus on your camera manually, you can use the focus adjustment located
at the bottom of each camera controller. Drag the wheel control left or right to manually adjust focus
while viewing the video feed from the camera to ensure your image is nice and sharp.

Click on the auto focus button or drag the manual focus


adjustment left or right to focus a compatible lens.

22 Using ATEM Software Control


Camera Gain
The camera gain setting allows you to turn on additional gain in your camera. This is important when
you are operating in low light conditions and need extra gain in the front end of your camera to avoid
your images being under exposed. You can decrease or increase gain by clicking on the left or right
arrows on the dB gain setting.
You can turn on some gain when you need it, such as outdoor shoots when the light fades at sunset
and you need to increase your image brightness. It's worth noting that adding gain will increase noise
in your images.
Hovering your mouse pointer over the gain, shutter
speed and white balance indicators reveal arrows
you can click on to adjust their respective settings.

Shutter Speed Control


The shutter speed control is located in the section between the color wheel and the iris/pedestal control.
Decrease or increase the shutter speed by hovering your mouse pointer over the shutter speed indicator
and then clicking on the left or right arrows.
If you see flicker in lights you can decrease your shutter speed to eliminate it. Decreasing shutter speed is
a good way to brighten your images without using camera gain because you are increasing the exposure
time of the image sensor. Increasing shutter speed will reduce motion blur so can be used when you
want action shots to be sharp and clean with minimal motion blur.

White Balance
The white balance setting next to the shutter speed control can be adjusted by clicking on the left or right
arrows on each side of the color temperature indicator. Different light sources emit warm or cool colors,
so you can compensate by adjusting the white balance. This ensures the whites in your image stay white.

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


If you have a color correction background, then you can change the camera control from a switcher
style CCU interface to a user interface that's more like a primary color corrector on a post production
color grading system.
Your Blackmagic Studio Camera features a DaVinci Resolve primary color corrector built in. If you have
used DaVinci Resolve, then creatively, grading in your Blackmagic Studio Camera will be identical so
you can use your color grading experience for live production.
The color corrector panel can be expanded out of any camera controller and provides expanded color
correction control with extra settings and a full primary color corrector interface.

Click on the DaVinci Resolve primary color corrector button


to expand the color correction window and adjust settings.

You have color wheels and settings such as saturation available and you can see shadows, mid tones
and highlight settings all at the same time. Simply switch between cameras using the camera selection
controls at the top of the window as you need.

23 Using ATEM Software Control


Color Wheels
The Lift/Gamma/Gain controls allow tonally specific yet overlapping regions of adjustment. In photographic
terms lift, gamma and gain corresponds to shadows, mid tones and highlights.
Use the color wheels in the following ways to make fine or aggressive adjustments:

Lift, gamma and gain color wheels


in the color corrector panel.

Click and drag anywhere within the color ring: Note that you dont need to drag the color
balance indicator itself. As the color balance indicator moves, the RGB parameters underneath
change to reflect the adjustments being made to each channel.

Shift-Click and drag within the color ring: Jumps the color balance indicator to the absolute
position of the pointer, letting you make faster and more extreme adjustments.

Double-click within the color ring: Resets the color adjustment without resetting the master
wheel adjustment for that control.

Click the reset control at the upper-right of a color ring: Resets both the color balance control
and its corresponding master wheel.

Master Wheels
Use the master wheels below the color wheels to adjust each YRGB channels lift, gamma and gain controls.
To make adjustments using the master wheel:

Adjust the master wheels by dragging


the wheel control left or right.

Drag the master wheel left or right: Dragging to the left darkens the selected parameter of
the image, dragging to the right lightens that parameter. As you make an adjustment, the YRGB
parameters underneath change to reflect the adjustment youre making. To make a Y-only
adjustment, hold down the ALT or Command key and drag left or right. Because the color corrector
uses YRGB processing, you can get quite creative and create unique affects by adjusting the Y
channel only. Y channel adjustments work best when the Lum Mix setting is set to the right side
to use YRGB processing vs the left side to use regular RGB processing. Normally, most DaVinci
Resolve colorists use the YRGB color corrector as you get a lot more control of color balance
without affecting overall gain, so you spend less time getting the look you want.

Contrast Setting
The Contrast setting gives you control over the distance between the darkest and lightest values of
an image. The effect is similar to making opposing adjustments using the lift and gain master wheels.
The default setting is 50%.
Drag the sliders left or right to adjust Contrast,
Saturation, Hue and Lum Mix settings.

Saturation Setting
The Saturation setting increases or decreases the amount of color in the image. The default setting is 50%.

24 Using ATEM Software Control


Hue Setting
The Hue setting rotates all hues of the image around the full perimeter of the color wheel. The default
setting of 180 degrees shows the original distribution of hues. Raising or lowering this value rotates all
hues forward or backward along the hue distribution as seen on a color wheel.
Contrast, Saturation, Hue and Lum Mix settings.

Lum Mix Setting


The color corrector built into your Blackmagic Studio Camera is based on the DaVinci Resolve primary
color corrector. DaVinci has been building color correctors since the early 1980s and most Hollywood
films are color graded on DaVinci Resolve than any other method.
This means the color corrector built into your Blackmagic Studio Camera has some unique and creatively
powerful features. The YRGB processing is one of those features.
When color grading, you can choose to use RGB processing, or YRGB processing. High end colorists
use YRGB processing because you have more precise control over color and you can independently
adjust the channels with better separation and more creative options.
When the Lum Mix control is set to the right side, you have the 100% output of the YRGB color corrector.
When you have the Lum Mix control set to the left side, you get 100% output of the RGB corrector. You
can set the Lum Mix to any position between the left and right to get a blend of output from both the
RGB and YRGB correctors.
Which is the correct setting to use? That's up to you, as color correction is a pure creative process and
there is no right and wrong, and the best setting is what you like the most and what you think looks good!

Synchronizing Settings
When connected, camera control signals are sent from the ATEM switcher to your Blackmagic Studio
Camera. If a setting is accidentally adjusted from your Studio Camera, camera control will automatically
reset that setting to maintain synchronization.

Developer Information

25 Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct
devices that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design, our approach is to open up our
protocols and we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device
addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as,
and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of
VANC line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of
255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a maximum
of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

26 Developer Information
Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data block.
The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.

Destination device (uint8)


Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual
devices are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate a
broadcast message to all devices.

Command length (uint8)


The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length
of the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of
the header or any trailing padding bytes.

Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message type
being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they do not
understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands that apply
to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are device specific.

Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set
to zero.

Command data (uint8[])


The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format
of the data section is defined by the command itself.

Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes. Any
padding bytes are NOT included in the command length.

Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to determine
which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant or unknown
commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

27 Developer Information
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration

Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.

Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration
parameters available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device
specific parameters. Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters
that apply to multiple types of devices.

Data type (uint8)


The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length is
used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

28 Developer Information
128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.

Operation type (uint8)


The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified
parameter. Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each
element will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type.
This operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other
value for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be clamped
according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through
255 are available for device specific purposes..

Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number
of elements.

The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

29 Developer Information
Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

.0

Focus

fixed16

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

.3

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

0.0

1.0

0.0=near, 1.0=far

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

.6

Optical image stabilisation boolean

trigger instantaneous autofocus

trigger instantaneous auto aperture


true=enabled, false=disabled

1
.0

Video mode

int8

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] =
dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k


DCI, 6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

30 Developer Information
Group

ID

Audio

2
.0

Type

Mic level

fixed16

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.1

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic


level input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6
Output

Parameter

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides


Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

31 Developer Information
Group

ID

Configuration

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

.1

Reserved

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

32 Developer Information
Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus


on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on camera


4
(10 ms = 10000 us = 0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27 0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01

select 1080p 23.98 mode on all


cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma adjust


for green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

16

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

76

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

Help

33 Help
Getting Help
The fastest way to obtain help is to go to the Blackmagic Design online support pages and check the
latest support material available for your camera.

Blackmagic Design Online Support Pages


The latest manual, software and support notes can be found at the Blackmagic Support Center at
www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.

Contacting Blackmagic Design Support


If you can't find the help you need in our support material, please use the "Send us an email" button on
the support page for your camera to email a support request. Alternatively, click on the "Find your local
support team" button on the support page and call your nearest Blackmagic Design support office.

Checking the Software Version Currently Installed


To check which version of Blackmagic Camera Utility software is installed on your computer, open the
About Blackmagic Camera Utility window.
On Mac OS X, open Blackmagic Camera Utility from the Applications folder. Select About
Blackmagic Camera Utility from the application menu to reveal the version number.
On Windows, open Blackmagic Camera Utility from your Start menu or Start Screen. Click on
the Help menu and select About Blackmagic Camera Utility to reveal the version number.

How to Get the Latest Software Updates


After checking the version of Blackmagic Camera Utility software installed on your computer, please visit
the Blackmagic Support Center at www.blackmagicdesign.com/support to check for the latest updates.
While it is usually a good idea to run the latest updates, it is wise to avoid updating any software if you
are in the middle of an important project.

Battery Replacement
The Studio Camera's built in battery is not user-serviceable. Should the battery require replacement,
you will need to send it to your nearest Blackmagic Design service center for replacement. If the camera
is outside of its warranty period, the battery replacement will incur a small service fee for the cost of
the battery, labor and return of the camera to you. Please contact Blackmagic Design Support to find
out details of where to send your camera, how to package it safely and how much the replacement will
cost in your country.

Warranty

34 Warranty
12 Month Limited Warranty
Blackmagic Design warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for
a period of 12 months from the date of purchase. If a product proves to be defective during this warranty
period, Blackmagic Design, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts
and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, you the Customer, must notify Blackmagic Design of the
defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance
of service. The Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to a
designated service center nominated by Blackmagic Design, with shipping charges pre paid. Customer
shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, insurance, duties, taxes, and any other charges for
products returned to us for any reason.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or
inadequate maintenance and care. Blackmagic Design shall not be obligated to furnish service under
this warranty: a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Blackmagic Design
representatives to install, repair or service the product, b) to repair damage resulting from improper
use or connection to incompatible equipment, c) to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the
use of non Blackmagic Design parts or supplies, or d) to service a product that has been modified or
integrated with other products when the effect of such a modification or integration increases the time
or difficulty of servicing the product. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY BLACKMAGIC DESIGN IN LIEU OF
ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
BLACKMAGIC DESIGNS RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE
WHOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BLACKMAGIC
DESIGN IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY ILLEGAL USE OF EQUIPMENT BY CUSTOMER. BLACKMAGIC IS
NOT LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM USE OF THIS PRODUCT. USER OPERATES THIS
PRODUCT AT OWN RISK.
Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design. All rights reserved. Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub, Multibridge
Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity and Leading the creative video revolution are registered trademarks in the US and other countries.
All other company and product names may be trade marks of their respective companies with which they are associated.

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X

Windows
201410


Blackmagic Studio Camera

Blackmagic Studio Camera


10

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Blackmagic Studio Camera

MFT


HyperDeck Shuttle

Blackmagic Design CEO

Blackmagic Studio Camera

ATEM Software Control


52 

38 

Blackmagic Studio Camera

38

52

40

53

40

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector

55

57

41 

Blackmagic Studio Camera -

41

Blackmagic Studio Camera -

42

43 
Camera Settings

Developer Information
58 
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol

58

Overview

58

Assumptions

58

Camera Settings

43

Blanking Encoding

58

Message Grouping

58

Audio Settings

44

Monitoring Settings

45

Studio Settings

46

47

48

49 

49

49

Blackmagic Camera Utility


50 
51 

51

51

66 

67 

38
Blackmagic Studio Camera

1.
45
2. LANC
LANC2.5mm
41
3.
0.25TRS PGM/
41
4.
0.206TRS
41

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

PUSH

12V

10

5.
1/4 XLR 2 41
6. /OPTICAL IN/OUT
2845km 42
7. SDI OUT
SDI 42
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

8. SDI IN
SDI PGM 42
9. REF
3 42
10. POWER
12-24V 42

PUSH

39
PUSH

11

11. 10LCD

12

45
12.

13. FOCUS
1 2LCD 47
14. IRIS
1 47

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

15. PTT
2
48

22

16. PGM
48
17. LUT

23

18.
LCD 48
19. SET
48
20. DISPLAY
/ 48
21. MENU
LCD 48

OPTICAL OUT

22.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
40 48

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

23. USB
USB mini 50

REF

12V

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

40

Blackmagic Studio Camera



Blackmagic Camera

PUSH

PUSH

2
3 12

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Studio Camera/
SDI IN

12V

OPTICAL OUT

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

Studio CameraStudio
Camera
1 LCD LCD
2

REF

OPTICAL IN

41
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
LANC

LANC2.5mm
MFTLANC

Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S


Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S
Olympus 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M.Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3

PGM/


SDI/1516 1516

SDI/
1516

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

2XLR
mic/line
SDI1
2

42
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
/OPTICAL IN/OUT

/LCStudio Camera HD3G-SDIStudio


Camera 4K6G-SDI
2845km
SDI

SDI
SDISDISDI
10-bit 4:2:2Blackmagic Studio Camera HD3G-SDIStudio Camera
4K12G-SDI
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

SDI
SDI PGM PGM
/
SDI Studio Camera
Blackmagic HyperDeck Shuttle HyperDeckSDI

REF

12V

12 24VStudio Camera
HD4Studio Camera 4K3

Camera Settings

43 Camera Settings
Camera Settings
Blackmagic Studio Camera MENU
SET

Video Format

Gain
0dB 6dB
+18dB

White Balance
6
3200K
4500K
5000K 5600K 6500K 7500K

Shutter Speed

ISO 1/501/2000
15

Studio Camera HD
and Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

Film
Studio Camera HDFilmLog
DaVinci Resolve

Video
Studio Camera HDStudio Camera 4KVideo
HDREC709

Language

44 Camera Settings
Audio Settings
Blackmagic Studio Camera MENU

Audio Input
XLR

Microphone Level

Studio Camera
1 2

Input Level
mic/line
Line Mic LowMic High

Ch 1 Input
1
1

Ch 2 Input
2
2

Phantom Power
XLR/ OnOff


10

Line

45 Camera Settings
Monitoring Settings
LCD MENU

Brightness
LCD 60

Zebra
Blackmagic Camera 100%


Medium

Focus Peaking
Off Low Medium
High
Medium

Tally Brightness
Low Medium High
Medium

46 Camera Settings
Studio Settings
LCD
MENU

Camera Number
ATEMStudio Camera

1-99 1

Reference Source
Studio Camera SDI

Reference Timing
/

Headset Level


50

Headset Mic Level



50

Program Mix
LCD


0

47 Camera Settings

Blackmagic Studio Camera10-bit 4:2:2SDI


ATEM Camera Converter
Studio CameraSDI/

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

Focus

MENU

Studio Camera FOCUS/


FOCUS1 FOCUS2

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

FOCUS
1
FOCUS

FOCUS1

IRIS

Video IRIS1
Film IRIS

Studio Camera

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

IRIS

DISPLAY

MENU

48 Camera Settings

PTT

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET


PTT 2

DISPLAY
MENU

PGM

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Studio CameraPTTPGM



SDI

LUT

Set

Display

LCD /
SDI

MENU

Blackmagic Studio Camera

49

Blackmagic Studio Camera10-bit 4:2:2SDI


ATEM Camera Converter

Studio CameraSDI/

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

Studio Camera 3
VTR

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Studio CameraSDI

REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

SDIHyperDeckSDI
HyperDeckSDIStudio CameraSDI

12V

Studio Camera SDIBlackmagic HyperDeck ShuttleSSD


SDI HyperDeckSDIStudio CameraSDI
LCD

Blackmagic Camera Utility

PUSH

50 Blackmagic Camera Utility


PUSH

Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera

Windows
Blackmagic Camera Utility PDF
Blackmagic Camera UtilityBlackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera Utility USB


Mini USB2.0

Blackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera Utility

Mini USB2.0

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

51

Studio Camera LCD

1 Studio Camera6
2 2


LANC
Studio Camera 2

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

ATEM Software Control

52 ATEM Software Control

Blackmagic Studio CameraATEM Software ControlATEM


Camera

DaVinci Resolve

ATEMATEMSDI
ATEMSDI
SDI
SDISDI

SDI

ATEM Camera Control


PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

HD

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

HD

PREVIEW

HD

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

CH 1

CH 2

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

HD

MULTI-VIEW

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

PUSH

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

OUT

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

IN

HD

3. Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings > Camera Number


Studio Camera 1ATEM
Cam 1Camera Number1

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

PGM SDI

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

CH 1CH 1

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

2. ATEM Studio ConverterSDIATEMSDI

4
AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

H/PHONE

ATEM Studio ConverterBlackmagic Studio


Camera

OUT

OUT

3. ATEMSDIMulti ViewATEM Studio


ConverterSDIMulti View
SDI

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

4
SDI OUT

CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

SDI OUT

IN

SDI OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

1. Blackmagic Studio CameraATEM Studio Converter

PRESS TO TALK

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

STEREO
IN
PUSH

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

Blackmagic Studio CameraATEM


SDI

HD

PUSH

CH 1

SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

2. ATEMSDIMulti ViewStudio
CameraSDIMulti View
SDI

REMOTE

LOCK TO TALK
IN
2

HDMI IN

REMOTE

STEREO IN

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

1. Blackmagic Studio CameraSDIATEMSDI

PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

IN

OPTICAL OUT/IN

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

4. Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings > Camera Number


Studio Camera 1ATEM
Cam 1Camera Number1

ATEM Software Control Preferences


Blackmagic Studio Camera
PGM

53 ATEM Software Control

Aux

ATEM Software ControlCamera


/

Aux

Aux

On Air

YRGB

DaVinci ResolveYRGB
3

YRGB

Paste to all

//

Paste to
all

54 ATEM Software Control


/

/
SHIFT

/MaccommandWindows
CONTROL

55 ATEM Software Control

dB

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector

CCU

Blackmagic Studio CameraDaVinci Resolve


Blackmagic Studio CameraDaVinci Resolve
DaVinci Resolve

DaVinci Resolve

56 ATEM Software Control

//

RGB

//

YRGB

YRGB
YALTCommand
YRGBY
Y
YRGBRGB
DaVinci ResolveYRGB

50

50

57 ATEM Software Control

180

Blackmagic Studio CameraDaVinci Resolve


DaVinci Resolve1980
DaVinci Resolve
Blackmagic Studio Camera
YRGB1
RGBYRGBYRGB

YRGB100
RGB100
RGBYRGB

ATEMStudio CameraATEMBlackmagic Studio


CameraStudio Camera

Developer Information

58 Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct
devices that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to open up our
protocols and we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device
addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are packed
from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as, and can be
assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of
VANC line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of
255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a maximum
of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

59 Developer Information
Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data
block. The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.
Destination device (uint8)
Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual
devices are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate
a broadcast message to all devices.
Command length (uint8)
The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length
of the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of
the header or any trailing padding bytes.
Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message type
being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they do not
understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands that apply
to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are device specific.
Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set
to zero.
Command data (uint8[])
The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data.
The format of the data section is defined by the command itself.
Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes. Any
padding bytes are NOT included in the command length.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to determine
which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant or unknown
commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

60 Developer Information
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.
Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration
parameters available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device
specific parameters. Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters
that apply to multiple types of devices.
Data type (uint8)
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length is
used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values
meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

61 Developer Information
128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
Operation type (uint8)
The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified
parameter. Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type. This
operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other
value for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be clamped
according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through
255 are available for device specific purposes..
Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

62 Developer Information
Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Focus

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=near, 1.0=far

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))

.3

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

trigger instantaneous auto aperture

.6

Optical image stabilisation

boolean

true=enabled, false=disabled

Video mode

int8

trigger instantaneous autofocus

1
.0

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] =
dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k


DCI, 6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

63 Developer Information
Group

ID

Parameter

Type

Audio

2
.0

Mic level

.1

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic


level input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6
Output

Index

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides


Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

64 Developer Information
Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

Reserved

Interpretation

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

65 Developer Information
Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus


on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 us =
0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01

select 1080p 23.98 mode on all


cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma adjust


for green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

16

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

76

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01

255

12

24

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

66

Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Camera

Blackmagic Design

www.blackmagicdesign.com/supportBlackmagic

Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Camera

Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Camera Utility

About Blackmagic Camera Utility


Mac OS X Blackmagic Camera Utility
About Blackmagic Camera Utility

WindowsBlackmagic Camera Utility


About Blackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera Utility Blackmagic


(www.blackmagicdesign.com/jp/support)

Studio Camera
Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design

67
12
Blackmagic Design 12
Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic
Design
Blackmagic Design


Blackmagic Design
a Blackmagic Design
b cBlackmagic
Design d
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design

Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design DeckLink HDLink
Workgroup Videohub Multibridge Pro Multibridge Extreme Intensity Leading the creative video revolution

Manuel d'utilisation et d'installation

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X
Windows

Franais

octobre 2014

Welcome
Bienvenue
Nous vous remercions d'avoir fait l'acquisition d'une Blackmagic Studio Camera.
Nous avons conu la Blackmagic Studio Camera avec beaucoup d'enthousiasme.
J'ai toujours ador la production en direct, et cela depuis mon adolescence. Dans
le pass, les camras pourvues des fonctions tally et rseau d'ordres taient trs
onreuses et trs grandes, donc difficiles grer. Nous souhaitions vraiment
remdier ce problme en crant une camra plus compacte incluant des
fonctionnalits telles que le rseau d'ordres, le tally et le contrle de la camra
qui sont normalement offertes par des camras de plus grande taille.
C'est la raison pour laquelle nous avons dvelopp la Blackmagic Studio Camera.
Nous dsirions crer une camra beaucoup plus petite pour des raisons de
portabilit, cependant les petites camras sont gnralement dotes de tous
petits crans. C'est ce que nous voulions viter. Ce que nous recherchions, c'tait
un viseur beaucoup plus grand ! Et voil le rsultat : la Blackmagic Studio Camera
est une petite camra broadcast mais elle possde un trs grand viseur qui est
un vrai plaisir utiliser. Il est trs facile de raliser une mise au point et un cadrage
prcis avec un viseur de cette taille.
Il va sans dire que vous bnficiez galement d'indicateurs tally, d'un rseau
d'ordres, d'une puissante batterie intgre sans oublier une camra d'excellente
qualit quipe d'une monture d'objectif Micro 4/3 flexible. C'est tout ce dont vous
avez besoin dans un seul produit ! Vous pouvez brancher des microphones munis
de bonnettes anti-vent mme si ces derniers ncessitent une alimentation fantme.
Comme la fibre optique est intgre, il vous est possible de placer votre camra
des kilomtres de votre mlangeur. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez mme ajouter
un HyperDeck Shuttle et utiliser la camra pour la production gnrale.
Nous esprons que vous allez utiliser votre nouvelle camra pour crer des
productions en direct exceptionnelles et produire des travaux au rendu remarquable
! Nous nous rjouissons de voir les travaux cratifs que vous allez raliser !

Grant Petty
PDG de Blackmagic Design

Sommaire

Blackmagic Studio Camera

71 
Mise en route

85 
Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control

Introduction la Blackmagic Studio Camera 71

Fonction Camera Control 85

Monter un objectif 73

Utilisation de la fonction Camera Control 86

Mise en route de votre camra 73

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector 88

74 
Connexions
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Ct gauche 74
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Ct droit 75

76 
Paramtres de la Studio Camera

Synchronisation des paramtres  90

91 
Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol 91
Overview91
Assumptions91

Paramtres de la camra 76

Blanking Encoding 91

Paramtres Audio 77

Message Grouping 91

Paramtres Monitoring 78
Paramtres Studio 79
Ajustement des paramtres 80
Paramtres supplmentaires 81

82 
Sortie vido de la camra
Connexion des mlangeurs vido 82
Connexion des enregistreurs 82

83 
Blackmagic Camera Utility
84 
Fixation des accessoires
Pare-soleil84
Autres accessoires 84

99 
Assistance
100 
Garantie

Mise en route

71 Mise en route
Introduction la Blackmagic Studio Camera

Caractristiques
1. VOYANT TALLY FRONTAL
Indique l'acteur quelle camra passe actuellement l'antenne. Voir page 78.
2. CONTRLE DISTANCE LANC
Le jack stro de 2,5mm pour le contrle distance LANC prend en charge le contrle du diaphragme, du
zoom et de la mise au point. Voir page 74.
3. CASQUE D'AVIATION
Connecteur TRS de 0,25" pour le contrle du programme et du son en rgie par le biais d'un casque d'aviation.
Voir page 74.
4. ENTRE POUR LE MICRO DU CASQUE
Connecteur TRS de 0,206" pour communiquer avec la rgie au moyen d'un casque d'aviation. Voir page 74.
5. ENTRES AUDIO
Deux connecteurs XLR symtriques de 1/4" pour le signal audio. Voir page 74.
2

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

PUSH

12V

10

6. ENTRE/SORTIE OPTIQUES
L'entre et la sortie optiques permettent une longueur de cble de 45 kilomtres. Voir page 75.
7. SORTIE SDI
Sortie SDI permettant une connexion un mlangeur ou un autre appareil. Voir page 75.
8. ENTRE SDI
L'entre SDI permet au cameraman de visualiser le signal de sortie du programme (PGM). Voir page 75.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

9. ENTRE DE RFRENCE
Permet de multiples camras d'tre synchronises un signal de rfrence blackburst ou tri-level. Voir page 75.
10. ALIMENTATION
Entre 12 - 24V pour l'alimentation et le chargement de la batterie. Voir page 75.

PUSH

72 Mise en route
PUSH

11

11. CRAN LCD 10"


Contrlez le signal de la camra en direct ou le signal du programme, ou visualisez le menu. Voir page 78.

12

12. VOYANT TALLY ARRIERE


Lorsqu'il est allum, il indique au cameraman que la camra est l'antenne.
13. BOUTON DE MISE AU POINT (FOCUS)
Appuyez une fois pour une mise au point automatique ou deux fois pour afficher le focus peaking (aide la
mise au point) sur l'cran LCD. Voir page 80.

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

14. BOUTON DIAPHRAGME (IRIS)


Appuyez une fois pour un rglage automatique de l'exposition. Voir page 80.
15. BOUTON PTT (APPUYER POUR PARLER)
Appuyez et maintenez le bouton enfonc pour parler. Appuyez deux fois rapidement pour une communication
mains libres. Appuyez nouveau pour revenir la configuration par dfaut. Voir page 81.

22

16. BOUTON PROGRAMME (PMG)


Appuyez pour basculer entre le signal en direct de la camra et le signal du programme provenant de la rgie
o se trouve le mlangeur. Voir page 81.
23

17. BOUTON LUT


Fonction non disponible actuellement.
18. BOUTONS DE NAVIGATION
Naviguez sur le menu affich sur l'cran LCD. Voir page 81.
19. BOUTON DE CONFIRMATION (SET)
Utilisez ce bouton pour confirmer les slections faites partir du menu. Voir page 81.
20. BOUTON AFFICHAGE (DISPLAY)
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour activer ou dsactiver les informations l'cran (repres pour le cadrage, indicateur
de batterie). Voir page 81.
21. BOUTON MENU
Accdez au menu sur l'cran LCD. Voir page 81.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

22. BOUTON DE MISE EN MARCHE


Appuyez sur le bouton de mise en marche pour allumer la Blackmagic Studio Camera. Appuyez sur le bouton
et maintenez-le enfonc pour teindre la camra. Voir page 73 et 81.

REF

12V

23. CONNECTEUR USB


Port USB mini B pour les mises jour du firmware. Voir page 83.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

73 Mise en route
Monter un objectif
Pour mettre en route votre Blackmagic Studio Camera, il vous suffit de monter un objectif et d'allumer
l'appareil. Pour retirer le cache de protection de la monture d'objectif, maintenez le bouton de verrouillage
enfonc et tournez le cache dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu' ce qu'il soit libr. Nous
vous recommandons d'teindre systmatiquement votre camra avant de monter ou d'ter un objectif.
Pour monter un objectif :

PUSH

PUSH

tape 1.

Alignez le point situ sur votre objectif avec celui de la monture. De nombreux objectifs possdent
un point bleu, rouge ou blanc ou un autre indicateur.

tape 2. Tournez l'objectif dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu' ce qu'il s'embote correctement.
tape 3. Pour retirer l'objectif, maintenez le bouton de verrouillage enfonc et tournez l'objectif dans le
sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu' ce que le point atteigne la position de midi puis
retirez-le dlicatement.

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

Si aucun objectif n'est assembl la camra, le capteur est expos la poussire et d'autres dbris. Il vous
est donc conseill de garder le cache anti-poussire autant que possible.

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Monter et retirer un objectif sur la Studio Camera


SDI IN

REF

12V

Mise en route de votre camra


La Studio Camra possde une batterie interne qui peut tre charge l'aide de l'adaptateur fourni.
La camra peut tre charge et utilise tout en tant connecte une source d'alimentation externe.
Puis elle basculera d'une source d'alimentation l'autre sans interruption.
tape 1. Appuyez sur le bouton de mise en marche situ au-dessous de l'cran LCD. L'image en direct de
la camra apparatra alors l'cran.
tape 2. Appuyez et maintenez le bouton de mise en marche enfonc pour teindre la camra.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

Utilisez l'adaptateur fourni pour charger la batterie interne et


mettre en marche la camra.

Connexions

74 Connexions
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Ct gauche
Contrle distance LANC
Le port LANC de votre camra permet de contrler distance la mise au point de l'objectif et les rglages
du diaphragme et du zoom lorsque vous utilisez un objectif compatible. Le port est un jack stro de 2,5 mm
qui prend en charge le protocole LANC.
Les objectifs Micro 4/3 actifs vous permettent de contrler le servo du zoom l'aide de la tlcommande
LANC. Les objectifs suivants sont pris en charge :
Objectif Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S
Objectif Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S
Objectif Micro 4/3 Olympus 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M.Zuiko EZ

Sortie Casque
Permet de contrler le programme et le son en rgie au moyen d'un casque d'aviation muni de connecteurs
de type "fixed wing". La gamme de casques d'aviation est tendue, elle part de modles d'oreillettes pour
une utilisation dans les studios jusqu'aux casques rduction de bruit de taille normale qui conviennent aux
concerts et vnements sportifs. L'audio est achemine partir des canaux 15 et 16 des signaux vido SDI et
fibre optique entrants. Les canaux 15 et 16 sont rarement utiliss durant la production et sont donc appropris
une utilisation pour le rseau d'ordres.

Entre pour le micro du casque


Pour communiquer avec la rgie au moyen d'un casque d'aviation. Le son est intgr aux canaux 15 et 16 des
signaux SDI et fibre optique qui sont achemins en rgie.

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

Entres audio
2 canaux d'audio symtrique analogique professionnelle sont pris en charge par les connecteurs XLR. Configurez
les niveaux d'entre de chaque canal l'aide du menu audio. Les entres prennent en charge les signaux de
niveau micro ainsi que les signaux de niveau ligne. Le type de signal est galement slectionnable partir
du menu audio. Le son est intgr aux canaux 1 et 2 du flux SDI.

75 Connexions
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Ct droit
Entre/Sortie optiques
L'entre et la sortie fibre optique utilisent des connecteurs LC conformes aux normes de l'industrie, qui
prennent en charge des signaux 3G-SDI sur la Studio Camera HD, et des signaux 6G-SDI sur la Studio Camera
4K. Le cble fibre optique est trs courant car il est galement utilis dans les rseaux informatiques. La
fibre optique permet une longueur de cble de 45 kilomtres ce qui est bien plus qu'il n'en faut mme pour
les diffusions d'vnements en plein air les plus exigeantes. Si les entres optiques et SDI sont toutes deux
connectes, le signal de sortie provenant de l'appareil qui a t connect en premier sera utilis.

Sortie SDI
Utilisez la sortie SDI pour acheminer de la vido 4:2:2 10 bits du matriel vido SDI professionnel tel que des
grilles de commutation, moniteurs, priphriques de capture SDI et mlangeurs broadcast. La Blackmagic
Studio Camera HD prend en charge les signaux 3G-SDI et la Studio Camera 4K les signaux 12G-SDI.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Entre SDI
L'entre SDI permet au cameraman de visualiser le signal de sortie du programme (PGM). Il vous suffit d'appuyer
sur le bouton PGM pour basculer entre le signal en direct de la camra et le signal du programme provenant
de la rgie o se trouve le mlangeur. Si les entres optiques et SDI sont toutes deux connectes, le signal
de sortie provenant de l'appareil qui a t connect en premier sera utilis. Si vous utilisez la Studio Camera
pour enregistrer sur un appareil tel que le Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, la sortie de l'Hyperdeck peut tre
connecte l'entre SDI pour vous permettre de lire ce que vous venez d'enregistrer.

Entre de rfrence

REF

Elle permet de multiples camras d'tre synchronises un signal de rfrence blackburst ou tri-level. Le
fait de synchroniser des camras un signal de rfrence externe facilite la prvention d'erreurs de timing
qui peuvent provoquer un saut de l'image lors de la commutation entre diffrentes camras.
12V

Bouton de mise en marche


Utilisez l'entre 12 - 24V pour connecter votre source d'alimentation et charger la batterie interne. Lorsque
la batterie est compltement charge, elle alimentera la camra pour une dure de 4 heures sur la Studio
Camera HD, et de 3 heures sur la Studio Camera 4K.

Paramtres de la Studio
Camera

76 Paramtres de la Studio Camera


Paramtres de la camra
Pour configurer les paramtres de votre Blackmagic Studio Camera, appuyez sur le bouton MENU.
Utilisez les boutons de navigation pour mettre les menus en surbrillance et confirmez votre slection l'aide
du bouton SET.

Format vido (Video Format)


Slectionnez le format vido que vous dsirez acheminer. Vous trouverez, ci-contre, une liste des formats compatibles.

Gain
Les paramtres Gain sont utiles lorsque vous tournez dans des situations o l'clairage est minime. Le paramtre
par dfaut est de 0dB et le gain peut tre augment par tranches de 6dB jusqu' 18dB.

Balance des blancs (White Balance)


Votre camra comporte 6 prrglages de balance des blancs pour une varit de tempratures de couleur.
3200K pour la lumire tungstne
4500K pour la lumire fluorescente
5000K, 5600K, 6500K et 7500K pour une varit de conditions de lumire naturelle.
Paramtres de la camra

Vitesse d'obturation (Shutter Speed)

Formats vido compatibles


Studio Camera HD
et Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

La vitesse d'obturation complte le paramtre ISO en rgulant la quantit de lumire reue par le capteur.
Il y a 15 diffrentes vitesses d'obturation disponibles de 1/50 sec 1/2000 sec.

Plage dynamique (Dynamic Range)


Film
Le paramtre film sur la Studio Camera HD comprend une courbe de gamma logarithmique pour maximiser les
informations de votre signal vido. Ce paramtre vous permet d'obtenir le meilleur des logiciels d'talonnage,
tels que DaVinci Resolve.
Vido
Le paramtre vido sur la Studio Camera HD et la Studio Camera 4K prend en charge la norme REC709 pour
la vido haute dfinition. Cette norme est compatible avec le matriel de studio moderne.

Langue
L'anglais est la langue par dfaut. D'autres langues telles que le japonais, franais, allemand, russe, espagnol,
chinois et coren seront disponibles ultrieurement.

77 Paramtres de la Studio Camera


Paramtres Audio
Pour ajuster les paramtres de l'entre et du contrle audio sur votre Blackmagic Studio Camera, appuyez
sur le bouton MENU et slectionnez l'icne microphone situ gauche de l'cran.

Entre audio (Audio Input)


Fait basculer l'audio entre le microphone interne de la camra et les connecteurs audio XLR.

Niveau du microphone (Microphone Level)


L'entre microphone ajuste les niveaux d'enregistrement du microphone intgr. Dplacez le curseur vers la
gauche ou la droite pour augmenter ou diminuer les niveaux. La Studio Camera est quipe d'un microphone
stro intgr. Le microphone intgr enregistre sur les canaux audio 1 et 2 quand aucune source audio
externe n'est connecte.

Niveau du signal d'entre (Input Level)

Paramtres Audio

Les connecteurs audio externes prennent en charge de l'audio de niveau micro ou de niveau ligne. Slectionnez
la fonction Line lorsque vous connectez du matriel audio externe tel qu'une console de mixage audio ou un
amplificateur. Slectionnez le paramtre Mic Low ou Mic High selon la force du signal de votre microphone. Il
est important de slectionner le niveau appropri pour viter que votre audio externe soit presque inaudible,
trop forte ou distordue.
Configurez les niveaux des signaux audio externes l'aide des flches gauche et droite.

Signal d'entre canal 1 (Ch 1 Input)


Dplacez l'icne du curseur audio vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour augmenter ou diminuer les niveaux
du canal 1. Le signal audio externe a la priorit sur le microphone intgr et est achemin sur le canal audio 1.

Signal d'entre canal 2 (Ch 2 Input)


Dplacez l'icne du curseur audio vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour augmenter ou diminuer les niveaux
du canal 2. Le signal audio externe a la priorit sur le microphone intgr et est achemin sur le canal audio 2.

Alimentation fantme (Phantom Power)


Activez ou dsactivez l'alimentation fantme pour les deux entres XLR externes en naviguant sur le menu
Audio et en slectionnant les fonctions On ou Off l'aide des flches. L'alimentation fantme est une mthode
permettant la transmission de l'alimentation travers des cbles de microphone et est une source d'alimentation
trs pratique pour les microphones condensateur. Il vous faut attendre au moins 10 secondes pour que
l'alimentation fantme se dcharge aprs la dconnexion avant de brancher un microphone autonome. Les
microphones plus anciens de type microphones ruban ne prennent pas en charge l'alimentation fantme.
Lorsque le paramtre Line est slectionn, l'alimentation fantme est dsactive.

78 Paramtres de la Studio Camera


Paramtres Monitoring
Pour ajuster les paramtres d'affichage de l'cran LCD, appuyez sur le bouton MENU et slectionnez
l'icne moniteur.

Luminosit (Brightness)
Dplacez le curseur vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour ajuster les paramtres de luminosit de l'cran LCD.
Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 60%.

Zebra
Les Blackmagic Cameras possdent une fonction zebra qui vous indique les niveaux d'exposition. Des lignes
diagonales apparaitront sur n'importe quelle zone de la vido qui excde le niveau d'exposition zebra.
Activez la fonction zebra et slectionnez le niveau d'alerte zebra souhait l'aide des flches gauche et droite.
Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur Medium.

Focus Peaking
Ce paramtre vous permet de changer le niveau de la fonction focus peaking (aide la mise au point). Faites
votre choix entre : off, low, medium et high. Ajustez ce paramtre lorsque vous utilisez un objectif trs net et
que l'image entire est crte. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur Medium.
Paramtres Monitoring

Luminosit du Tally (Tally Brightness)


Ce paramtre permet de changer la luminosit du voyant tally frontal. Faites votre choix entre : low, medium
et high. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur Medium.

79 Paramtres de la Studio Camera


Paramtres Studio
Pour ajuster les paramtres d'affichage de l'cran LCD, appuyez sur le bouton MENU et slectionnez
l'icne casque.

Numro de la camra (Camera Number)


Si vous dsirez que votre Studio Camera reoive des signaux tally d'un mlangeur ATEM, il vous faudra configurer
le numro de la camra sur votre camra. Cela permettra au mlangeur d'envoyer le signal tally la bonne
camra. Le numro de camra peut tre rgl sur une valeur entre 1-99. Le paramtre par dfaut est de 1.

Source de rfrence (Reference Source)


Ce paramtre est utilis pour slectionner la source du genlock. La Studio Camera peut tre synchronise au
signal de programme SDI ou une source de genlock externe. Si vous utilisez une source de genlock externe,
gardez l'esprit que le changement de source peut crer un saut d'image lorsque la camra se synchronise
la nouvelle source.

Rythme de rfrence (Reference Timing)


Ce paramtre vous permet d'ajuster manuellement le rythme de rfrence dfini par un nombre de lignes
ou de pixels.
Paramtres Studio

Niveau du casque (Headset Level)


Dplacez le curseur de volume gauche ou droite pour augmenter ou diminuer les niveaux du contrle
audio. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 50%.

Niveau du micro du casque (Headset Mic Level)


Dplacez le curseur de volume gauche ou droite pour augmenter ou diminuer les niveaux d'entre audio
du microphone. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 50%.

Balance audio du rseau d'ordres (Program Mix)


Ce paramtre permet de basculer de la balance du son de la camra celle du son du rseau d'ordres. Les
couteurs achemineront l'audio suivie par ce qui est affich sur l'cran LCD. Par exemple, si le signal provenant
de la camra est affich, vous entendrez l'audio provenant de la camra. Par contre, si c'est le signal du
programme qui est affich, vous entendrez l'audio du programme. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 0%.

80 Paramtres de la Studio Camera


Ajustement des paramtres

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

La Blackmagic Studio Camera prend en charge le contrle d'objectif lectronique, ce qui vous permet d'ajuster
les paramtres de l'objectif tels que le diaphragme et la mise au point automatique. La fonction focus peaking
est une aide la mise au point qui cre un bord vert autour des zones de l'image les plus nettes, ce qui vous
permet de confirmer facilement votre mise au point. Cette fonction n'apparat que sur votre cran LCD et
SET
MENU
n'affecte
pas la sortie SDI. DISPLAY

Bouton Mise au point (Focus)


FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Appuyez une fois sur le bouton FOCUS pour un focus


automatique. Pour activer le focus peaking appuyez deux fois
rapidement sur le bouton FOCUS.

Lorsque vous utilisez la Studio Camera avec un objectif mise au point automatique, appuyez sur le bouton
FOCUS pour faire votre slection entre les fonctions focus peaking et mise au point automatique (autofocus).
Pour slectionner la mise au point automatique, appuyez une fois sur le bouton FOCUS. Pour activer le focus
peaking appuyez deux fois rapidement sur le bouton FOCUS.
Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif manuel, appuyez une fois sur le bouton FOCUS pour activer la fonction
focus peaking.

Bouton Diaphragme (Iris)


Lorsque vous utilisez les paramtres de plage dynamique en mode vido, une simple pression sur le bouton
IRIS configurera l'exposition moyenne partir des hautes lumires et des zones d'ombres de votre prise de
vue. Lorsque vous utilisez les paramtres de plage dynamique en mode film, une pression sur le bouton IRIS
configurera votre exposition partir des plus hautes lumires de votre prise de vue.
FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

Pour rgler votre diaphragme manuellement sur la Studio Camera, appuyez sur les boutons de navigation
DISPLAYle bas.
MENU
flches vers le haut ou vers

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Appuyez sur le bouton IRIS pour une exposition automatique


ou utilisez les boutons de navigation flches vers le bas ou
vers le haut pour une exposition manuelle.

81 Paramtres de la Studio Camera


Paramtres supplmentaires
Appuyer pour parler (PTT)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

Lors de la production en direct, il est primordial que les cameramen puissent communiquer avec le ralisateur
et les personnes se trouvant en rgie. Il vous suffit d'appuyer et de maintenir le bouton enfonc et vous pouvez
ensuite commencer
parler.MENU
Appuyez deux fois rapidement pour une communication mains libres. Appuyez
DISPLAY
nouveau pour revenir la configuration par dfaut.

Programme (PGM)
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

La Studio Camera dispose de paramtres essentiels pour la


production en direct, tels que PTT et PGM.

Parfois, il est important que les cameramen puissent visualiser le signal du programme au lieu du signal de
leur propre camra. Il vous suffit d'appuyer sur le bouton PGM pour basculer entre le signal en direct de
la camra et le signal du programme provenant de la rgie o se trouve le mlangeur. Vous pouvez utiliser
l'entre SDI ou l'entre optique pour connecter votre source vido externe.

Bouton LUT
Fonction non disponible actuellement.

Flches vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite


Utilisez ces boutons pour naviguer sur les menus.

Bouton de confirmation SET


Utilisez ce bouton pour confirmer les slections faites partir du menu.

Bouton Affichage (Display)


Active et dsactive les repres de cadrage et l'indicateur de batterie sur l'cran LCD. Les informations
l'cran ne sont pas prsentes sur le signal de sortie SDI.

Bouton Menu
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour faire apparatre le menu, puis naviguez l'aide des boutons flche.

Bouton de mise en marche


Appuyez sur le bouton de mise en marche pour allumer la Blackmagic Studio Camera. Appuyez sur le bouton
et maintenez-le enfonc pour teindre la camra.

Sortie vido de la
camra

82 Sortie vido de la camra


Connexion des mlangeurs vido
Les Blackmagic Studio Cameras acheminent de la vido 4:2:2 10 bits, ce qui vous permet de vous connecter
des mlangeurs broadcast ainsi qu' d'autres priphriques vido SDI. La Blackmagic Studio Camera
dispose d'une entre et d'une sortie optiques, il n'est donc pas ncessaire de connecter d'ATEM Camera
Converters la camra.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

Pour visualiser la sortie du programme (PGM) partir du mlangeur, il suffit de le connecter l'entre SDI ou
fibre optique de votre Studio Camera.

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

La Studio Camera comporte galement une entre de rfrence qui permet de multiples camras d'tre
synchronises un signal blackburst ou tri-level. Le fait de synchroniser des camras, magntoscopes et autres
appareils un signal de rfrence externe facilite l'limination d'erreurs de timing qui peuvent provoquer un
saut de l'image lors de la commutation entre diffrentes sources.

Connexion des enregistreurs

SDI IN

Connectez des cbles SDI ou fibre optique de votre Studio


Camera un mlangeur de production ou autre appareil.
REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

12V

SDI OUT

Connectez la sortie SDI de la camra l'entre SDI de


l'Hyperdeck et connectez la sortie SDI de l'Hyperdeck
l'entre SDI de la camra pour visualiser vos enregistrements.

Si vous souhaitez enregistrer le signal de sortie de votre Studio Camera, il vous suffit de connecter la
sortie SDI l'entre SDI d'un enregistreur SSD comme le Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle. La sortie SDI de
l'Hyperdeck peut ensuite tre connecte l'entre SDI de la Studio Camera, ce qui vous permet de visualiser
vos enregistrements sur l'cran LCD de la camra.

Blackmagic Camera
Utility

PUSH

83 Blackmagic Camera Utility


PUSH

Comment mettre jour le logiciel de votre camra sur Mac OS X


Aprs avoir tlcharg le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility et dzipp le fichier tlcharg, ouvrez limage
disque pour rvler son contenu.
Lancez le Blackmagic Camera Installer et suivez les instructions figurant sur lcran.

Comment mettre jour le logiciel de votre camra sur Windows


Aprs avoir tlcharg le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility et dzipp le fichier tlcharg, un dossier
Blackmagic Camera Utility devrait safficher, contenant ce manuel en PDF ainsi que le programme d'installation
Blackmagic Camera Utility.
Double-cliquez sur le programme d'installation et suivez les instructions figurant sur lcran pour terminer
linstallation.

Comment mettre jour le logiciel de la camra

Le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility

Aprs avoir install le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility le plus rcent sur votre ordinateur, connectez un
cble USB entre lordinateur et la camra. Le mini port USB 2.0 est situ sur le dessous de la camra.
Lancez le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility et suivez les instructions figurant sur lcran pour mettre jour
le logiciel de la camra.

Le mini port USB 2.0 est situ sur le dessous de la camra.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Fixation des
accessoires

84 Fixation des accessoires


Pare-soleil
La Studio Camera inclut un pare-soleil pliable pour abriter lcran lorsque la luminosit est forte et assurer
un affichage optimal en permanence.
tape 1. Reprez les 6 vis ailes se trouvant sur votre Studio Camera.
tape 2. Alignez les trous situs sur le pare-soleil avec les points de montage de la camra et vissez 2 vis
ailes sur le dessus et les deux cts de la camra pour que le pare-soleil tienne bien en place.

Autres accessoires
Pour les productions en studio, il se peut que vous dsiriez monter la camra sur un pidestal et ajouter
des rails pour les gros objectifs broadcast et les prompteurs. Pour la diffusion en plein air, vous prfrerez
peut-tre ajouter des micros, batteries externes et des contrleurs distance LANC. La camra dispose de
deux points de montage de 3/8 sur la face infrieure, et de dix points de montage de 1/4 sur les cts et
la face suprieure. Cela signifie que vous avez la flexibilit de configurer votre matriel pour n'importe quel
type de production.
2

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

Utilisation de l'ATEM
Software Control

85 Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control


Fonction Camera Control
Votre Blackmagic Studio Camera peut tre commande partir d'un mlangeur ATEM au moyen de la fonction
Camera Control du logiciel ATEM Software Control. Pour ouvrir la fonction Camera Control, il suffit de cliquer
sur le bouton Camera. Les paramtres tels que l'iris, le gain et la mise au point sont facilement ajustables avec
des objectifs compatibles. Vous pouvez galement ajuster l'quilibrage des camras et crer des rendus
fabuleux l'aide du correcteur de couleurs DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector.
Le mlangeur ATEM contrle la camra en diffusant des paquets de contrle via toutes les sorties SDI de
votre mlangeur qui ne sont pas down-converties. Cela signifie que vous pouvez connecter une sortie SDI de
votre mlangeur ATEM l'entre vido de la camra et cette dernire dtectera les paquets de contrle dans
la connexion SDI et vous permettra de contrler les fonctionnalits de la camra. Il est possible de contrler
votre camra partir de connexions SDI standard ou de connexions SDI fibre optique.

Connexion via SDI

Fonction Camera Control de lATEM


PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

HD

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

HD

PREVIEW

HD

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

CH 1

CH 2

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

HD

MULTI-VIEW

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

PUSH

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

HD

CH 2

CH 1CH 1

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

tape 3. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU de votre Blackmagic Studio Camera. Allez sur Studio >Camera
Number et faites correspondre le numro l'entre du mlangeur. Par exemple, si la Studio Camera
1 est connecte la Cam 1 sur le mlangeur ATEM, le numro de la camra doit galement tre
configur sur 1. Ainsi, le tally est envoy la camra approprie.
MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

tape 1.

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT
PRESS TO TALK

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

OUT

Connectez l'entre/sortie fibre optique de votre Blackmagic Studio Camera l'entre/sortie fibre
optique de l'ATEM Studio Converter.

tape4 2. Connectez une sortie SDI approprie de l'ATEM Studio Converter n'importe quelle entre SDI
du mlangeur ATEM.
AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

OUT

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

STEREO
IN
PUSH

Connexion via fibre optique

Connectez votre Blackmagic Studio Camera n'importe


quelle entre SDI du mlangeur ATEM.

HD

PUSH

CH 1

SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

tape 2. Connectez n'importe quelle sortie SDI du mlangeur ATEM, except les sorties down-converties
ou Multi View, l'entre SDI de votre Studio Camera. Les signaux Camera Control ne sont pas
achemins via les sorties SDI down-converties et Multi View.

REMOTE

LOCK TO TALK
IN
2

HDMI IN

REMOTE

STEREO IN

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

tape 1. Connectez la sortie SDI de votre Blackmagic Studio Camera n'importe quelle entre SDI du
mlangeur ATEM.

PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

IN

PGM SDI

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

SDI OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Connectez plusieurs Blackmagic Studio Cameras via fibre


optique au moyen d'un ATEM Studio Converter.

IN

SDI OUT

tape 3. Connectez n'importe quelle sortie SDI du mlangeur ATEM, except les sorties down-converties
ou Multi View, l'entre SDI de l'ATEM Studio Converter. Les signaux Camera Control ne sont pas
achemins via les sorties SDI down-converties et Multi View.

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

IN

OPTICAL OUT/IN

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

tape 4. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU de votre Blackmagic Studio Camera. Allez sur Studio >Camera
Number et faites correspondre le numro l'entre du mlangeur. Par exemple, si la Studio Camera
1 est connecte la Cam 1 sur le mlangeur ATEM, le numro de la camra doit galement tre
configur sur 1. Ainsi, le tally est envoy la camra approprie.
Ouvrez les prfrences de l'ATEM Software Control et configurez le mappage des boutons du mlangeur pour
garantir une commutation de la bonne camra avec le tally appropri. Vous avez prsent une connexion
vido partant du mlangeur vers votre Blackmagic Studio Camera, vous pouvez galement bnficier des
indicateurs tally en direct sur la camra. De plus, il est possible de visualiser le flux de programme du mlangeur
en appuyant sur le bouton PGM de votre camra.

86 Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control


Utilisation de la fonction Camera Control

Cliquez sur l'icne de la roue dente pour slectionner


la sortie auxiliaire pour la fonction Camera Control.

Lancez le logiciel ATEM Software Control et cliquez sur le bouton Camera situ au bas de la fentre du logiciel.
Vous apercevrez une range de fentres qui permettent de commander toutes les camras et qui contiennent
des outils puissants pour ajuster et affiner l'image de chaque camra. Les commandes sont trs faciles utiliser.
Il vous suffit de cliquer sur les boutons l'aide de votre souris, ou de cliquer et dplacer les curseurs pour effectuer
des ajustements.

Slection de la camra commander


La range de boutons situe sur le haut de la fentre de contrle de la camra vous permet de slectionner le numro
de la camra que vous souhaitez commander. Si vous avez de nombreuses camras sur cette fentre, ou que vous
utilisez la fentre de correction colorimtrique, il vous suffit d'appuyer sur ces boutons pour slectionner la camra
que vous souhaitez commander. Si vous utilisez une sortie auxiliaire pour le monitoring du Camera Control, le fait
d'appuyer sur ces boutons pour changer la camra commander enverra galement la sortie vido de la camra
vers le paramtrage de la sortie auxiliaire au sein des prfrences du mlangeur.

tat du canal
La section tat du canal est situe dans la partie suprieure de chaque fentre de contrle de camra et affiche le label
de la camra, l'indicateur de passage l'antenne et le bouton de verrouillage. Appuyez sur le bouton de verrouillage
pour verrouiller toutes les commandes relatives une camra spcifique. Lorsque la camra est l'antenne, la section
tat du canal s'illumine en rouge et affiche l'alerte On Air.

Cercles chromatiques
Chaque fentre de contrle de camra affiche l'tat du canal
afin que vous sachiez quelle camra est l'antenne. Utilisez
les cercles chromatiques pour ajuster les paramtres Lift,
Gamma et Gain de chaque canal YRGB.

Le cercle chromatique est une fonctionnalit puissante du correcteur de couleurs DaVinci Resolve et permet d'effectuer
des ajustements de couleur pour les paramtres lift, gamma et gain de chaque canal YRGB. Pour slectionner le
paramtre ajuster, il vous suffit de cliquer sur un des trois boutons de slection situs au-dessus du cercle chromatique.

Roue matresse
Utilisez la roue matresse situe sous le cercle chromatique pour effectuer des ajustements de contraste sur tous les
canaux YRGB en mme temps, ou uniquement de luminance pour les paramtres lift, gamma ou gain.

Boutons de rinitialisation

Lorsque vous appliquez la fonction Paste to all (Coller


toutes les fentres), un message apparat pour confirmer
cette action. De cette faon, vous ne collez pas de nouveaux
paramtres accidentellement aux camras non verrouilles en
cours de diffusion.

Le bouton de rinitialisation situ dans la partie suprieure droite de la fentre de contrle de la camra vous permet
de choisir aisment les paramtres de correction colorimtrique que vous souhaitez rinitialiser, copier ou coller.
Chaque cercle chromatique possde galement son propre bouton de rinitialisation. Appuyez sur ce bouton pour
restaurer le paramtre par dfaut, ou pour copier/coller un paramtre. Les fentres de contrle de camra verrouilles
ne sont pas affectes par la fonction Paste.
Le bouton de rinitialisation principal est situ en haut droite de la fentre de correction colorimtrique. Il vous
permet de rinitialiser les cercles chromatiques Lift, Gamma et Gain ainsi que les paramtres Contrast, Saturation,
Hue et Lum Mix. Vous pouvez coller les paramtres de correction colorimtrique des fentres de contrle de
camra individuelles ou toutes les fentres en mme temps pour crer un rendu uniforme. Les paramtres relatifs
l'iris, la mise au point et au niveau de noir ainsi que le paramtre Coarse ne sont pas affects par la fonction Paste.
Lorsque vous souhaitez appliquer la fonction Paste to all (coller toutes les fentres), un message apparatra pour
confirmer cette action. De cette faon, vous ne collerez pas de nouveaux paramtres accidentellement aux camras
non verrouilles en cours de diffusion.

87 Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control


Contrle de l'iris et du niveau de noir
Le contrle de l'iris et du niveau de noir est situ au sein de la croix de centrage de chaque fentre de contrle
de camra. Le contrle s'illumine en rouge lorsque la camra est l'antenne.
Pour ouvrir ou fermer l'iris, dplacez le contrle vers le haut ou vers le bas. En maintenant la touche SHIFT
enfonce, vous pourrez ajuster uniquement l'iris.
Pour assombrir ou claircir le niveau de noir, dplacez le contrle vers la gauche ou vers la droite. En maintenant
la touche Command (Mac) ou Control (Windows) enfonce vous pourrez ajuster uniquement le niveau de noir.

Paramtre Coarse
Le paramtre Coarse est situ gauche du contrle de l'iris/niveau de noir et permet de limiter l'ouverture
de l'iris. Cette fonctionnalit vous aide ne pas faire passer des images surexposes l'antenne.
Pour configurer cette limite, ouvrez compltement l'iris l'aide de la fonction de contrle de l'iris, puis
dplacez le curseur Coarse vers le haut ou vers le bas pour configurer l'exposition optimale. prsent, lorsque
vous ajustez l'iris, la limite que vous avez configure l'aide du paramtre Coarse l'empchera de dpasser
l'exposition optimale.

Indicateur de l'iris
L'indicateur de l'iris est situ droite du contrle de l'iris/niveau de noir et fait office de rfrence visuelle
vous permettant de visualiser l'ouverture de lentille. L'indicateur de l'iris est affect par le paramtre Coarse.
Le contrle de l'iris/niveau de noir s'illumine en rouge lorsque
sa camra respective est l'antenne.

Bouton de mise au point automatique


Le bouton de mise au point automatique est situ en bas gauche de chaque fentre de contrle de camra.
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour un rglage automatique de la mise au point lorsque vous utilisez un objectif
actif qui prend en charge les ajustements de mise au point lectronique. Il est important de savoir que bien
que la plupart des objectifs prennent en charge la mise au point lectronique, certains objectifs peuvent tre
rgls en mode de mise au point manuelle ou automatique. Il vous faudra donc vrifier que votre objectif est
bien rgl en mode de mise au point automatique. Pour ce faire, il suffit parfois de faire glisser la bague de
mise au point vers l'avant ou vers l'arrire.

Ajustement manuel de la mise au point


Lorsque vous souhaitez ajuster manuellement la mise au point sur votre camra, vous pouvez utiliser l'ajustement
de mise au point situ au bas de chaque fentre de contrle de camra. Dplacez la roue vers la gauche ou
vers la droite pour ajuster manuellement la mise au point tout en visualisant le flux vido de la camra pour
vous assurer que votre image est belle et nette.
Cliquez sur le bouton de mise au point automatique ou
dplacez le curseur de mise au point manuelle vers la
gauche ou vers la droite pour effectuer la mise au point
d'un objectif compatible.

88 Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control


Gain de la camra
Le paramtre relatif au gain de la camra vous permet d'ajouter du gain supplmentaire votre camra.
C'est trs important lorsque vous travaillez dans des conditions o la lumire est minime et que vous avez
besoin de gain supplmentaire au niveau du capteur pour viter que vos images ne soient sous-exposes.
Vous pouvez rduire ou augmenter le gain en cliquant sur les flches gauche ou droite situes ct du
paramtre gain (dB).
Il est possible d'ajouter du gain tout moment, par exemple lorsque la lumire baisse au coucher du soleil
lors d'un tournage en extrieur et qu'il vous faut augmenter la luminosit de votre image. Il faut bien garder
l'esprit que le fait d'ajouter du gain augmentera le bruit dans vos images.
Faites passer le pointeur de votre souris sur les indicateurs de
gain, de vitesse d'obturation et de balance des blancs pour
faire apparatre les flches qui vous permettront d'ajuster
leurs paramtres respectifs.

Contrle de la vitesse d'obturation


Le contrle de la vitesse d'obturation est situ dans la section entre le cercle chromatique et le contrle de
l'iris/niveau de noir. Rduisez ou augmentez la vitesse d'obturation en faisant passer le pointeur de votre souris
sur l'indicateur de la vitesse d'obturation, puis cliquez sur les flches gauche ou droite.
Si vous observez des scintillements, vous pouvez diminuer votre vitesse d'obturation pour les liminer.
Diminuer la vitesse d'obturation est un bon moyen d'claircir vos images sans utiliser le gain de la camra
car vous augmentez ainsi le temps de pose du capteur d'image. Le fait d'augmenter la vitesse d'obturation
rduira le flou de boug, ce qui est idal lorsque vous souhaitez obtenir des scnes d'action nettes avec un
flou de boug minimal.

Balance des blancs


Le paramtre de balance des blancs est situ ct du contrle de la vitesse d'obturation. Il peut tre rgl
en utilisant les flches gauche et droite situes de chaque ct de l'indicateur de temprature de couleur.
Les sources lumineuses mettent des couleurs plus ou moins chaudes ou froides qui peuvent tre rgles
l'aide de la balance des blancs. Les blancs de votre image demeureront ainsi rellement blancs.

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


Si vous avez de l'exprience dans le domaine de la correction colorimtrique, il est possible de changer
l'interface de commande des camras pour obtenir un style d'interface qui ressemble celle d'un correcteur
colorimtrique primaire que l'on trouve communment sur les systmes dtalonnage.
Votre Blackmagic Studio Camera intgre le correcteur colorimtrique primaire DaVinci Resolve. Si vous avez
utilis DaVinci Resolve auparavant, crativement parlant, l'talonnage sur la Blackmagic Studio Camera sera
identique celui de DaVinci, vous aurez donc l'opportunit de mettre votre exprience d'talonnage profit
pour la production en direct.
La fentre de correction colorimtrique peut tre agrandie et fournit un contrle de correction colorimtrique
plus tendu comprenant des paramtres supplmentaires ainsi qu'une interface de correction colorimtrique
primaire complte.
Cliquez sur le bouton du correcteur colorimtrique primaire
DaVinci Resolve pour agrandir la fentre de correction
colorimtrique et ajuster les paramtres.

Vous disposez prsent de cercles chromatiques et de paramtres tels que la saturation. Vous pouvez
galement visualiser tous les paramtres relatifs aux basses lumires, tons moyens et hautes lumires en
mme temps. Il vous suffit de commuter entre les camras l'aide des commandes de slection situes sur
le haut de la fentre lorsqu'il est ncessaire.

89 Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control


Cercles chromatiques
Les commandes Lift/Gamma/Gain permettent de contrler des zones dfinies par leurs tons. Toutefois, ces
zones se chevauchent. En photographie, les termes lift, gamma et gain correspondent aux basses lumires,
tons moyens et hautes lumires.
Utilisez les cercles chromatiques de l'une ou l'autre des faons dcrites ci-aprs pour effectuer des ajustements
minutieux ou plus extrmes :

Cliquez et dplacez votre pointeur n'importe o dans le cercle de couleur : Notez qu'il n'est
pas ncessaire de positionner votre pointeur sur l'indicateur de la balance des couleurs. Lorsque
l'indicateur de la balance des couleurs se dplace, les paramtres RGB situs sous le cercle
chromatique se modifient pour reflter les ajustements apports chaque canal.

Cliquez en maintenant le bouton SHIFT enfonc et dplacez votre pointeur n'importe o dans
le cercle de couleur : L'indicateur de la balance des couleurs se positionnera l'endroit mme
o se trouve le pointeur, ce qui vous permet de faire des ajustements plus rapides et extrmes.

Double-cliquez n'importe o dans le cercle de couleur : Rinitialise l'ajustement apport la


couleur sans rinitialiser l'ajustement apport la roue matresse pour la commande en question.

Cliquez sur la commande de rinitialisation situe en haut droite du cercle de couleur :


Rinitialise le contrle de la balance des couleurs ainsi que la roue matresse correspondante.

Cercles chromatiques Lift, Gamma et Gain dans la fentre de


correction colorimtrique.

Roues matresses
Utilisez les roues matresses situes sous les cercles chromatiques pour ajuster les commandes Lift, Gamma
et Gain de chaque canal YRGB.
Pour effectuer des ajustements l'aide de la roue matresse :

Ajustez les roues matresses en dplaant la commande vers
la gauche ou vers la droite.

Dplacez la roue matresse vers la gauche ou vers la droite : Un dplacement vers la gauche
assombrit le paramtre slectionn de l'image alors qu'un dplacement vers la droite claircit ce
mme paramtre. Lors de l'ajustement, les paramtres YRGB situs au-dessous de la roue matresse
se modifient pour reflter l'ajustement en cours. Pour effectuer un ajustement n'affectant que la
luminance, maintenez la touche ALT ou Command enfonce et dplacez la roue vers la gauche
ou vers la droite. Comme le correcteur colorimtrique prend en charge un traitement YRGB, il
vous permet de faire preuve de crativit et de crer des effets uniques en ajustant uniquement
le canal Y. Les ajustements du canal Y fonctionnent mieux lorsque le paramtre Lum Mix est rgl
sur le ct droit pour un traitement YRGB et sur le ct gauche pour un traitement RGB standard.
En gnral, la plupart des coloristes DaVinci Resolve utilisent le correcteur colorimtrique YRGB
car on obtient une meilleure matrise de la balance des couleurs sans affecter le gain gnral.
Il vous faudra ainsi moins de temps pour obtenir le rendu dsir.

90 Utilisation de l'ATEM Software Control


Paramtre Contrast
Le paramtre Contrast vous permet de contrler la distance entre les valeurs les plus sombres et les plus
claires d'une image. L'effet ressemble celui effectu lorsque vous utilisez les roues matresses Lift et Gain. Par
dfaut, ce paramtre est rgl sur 50%.
Dplacez les curseurs vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour
ajuster les paramtres Contrast, Saturation, Hue et Lum Mix.

Paramtre Saturation
Le paramtre Saturation augmente ou rduit la quantit de couleur de l'image. Par dfaut, ce paramtre est
rgl sur 50%.

Paramtre Hue
Le paramtre Hue fait tourner toutes les teintes de l'image sur le primtre complet du cercle chromatique.
Le paramtre par dfaut de 180 degrs affiche la distribution originale des teintes. L'augmentation ou la
diminution de cette valeur fait tourner toutes les teintes vers l'avant ou vers l'arrire selon la distribution des
teintes d'un cercle chromatique.
Paramtres Contrast, Saturation, Hue et Lum Mix.

Paramtre Lum Mix


Le correcteur colorimtrique intgr votre Blackmagic Studio Camera est bas sur le correcteur colorimtrique
primaire DaVinci Resolve. DaVinci a cr des logiciels de correction colorimtrique depuis le dbut des annes
80 et la plupart des films hollywoodiens sont talonns sur DaVinci Resolve.
Cela signifie que le correcteur colorimtrique intgr votre Blackmagic Studio Camera possde des
fonctionnalits uniques et puissantes sur le plan cratif. Le traitement YRGB est l'une de ces fonctionnalits.
Lorsque vous talonnez, vous pouvez choisir entre un traitement RGB ou un traitement YRGB. Les coloristes
professionnels utilisent le traitement YRGB car ils obtiennent ainsi un contrle plus prcis de la couleur et peuvent
ajuster les canaux de faon indpendante avec une meilleure sparation et davantage d'options cratives.
Lorsque le paramtre Lum Mix est rgl sur le ct droit, vous avez une sortie provenant 100% du correcteur
colorimtrique YRGB. Lorsque le paramtre Lum Mix est rgl sur le ct gauche, vous obtenez une sortie
provenant 100% du correcteur RGB. Vous pouvez rgler le paramtre Lum Mix sur n'importe quelle position
entre la gauche et la droite pour obtenir un mlange de sortie provenant des deux correcteurs RGB et YRGB.
Quelle est la configuration idale ? Cela n'en tient qu' vous car la correction colorimtrique est un procd
purement cratif o il n'y a pas de juste ou de faux. Le meilleur paramtrage est donc celui qui vous plat le plus !

Synchronisation des paramtres


Lorsque les deux appareils sont connects, les signaux Camera Control sont envoys du mlangeur ATEM
votre Blackmagic Studio Camera. Si un paramtre est accidentellement ajust partir de votre Studio Camera, la
fonction Camera Control rinitialisera automatiquement le paramtre en question pour maintenir la synchronisation.

Developer
Information

91 Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct devices
that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to open up our protocols and
we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control messages
embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing
is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are packed from
LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as, and can be assumed to
be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of VANC
line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of 255
bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a maximum of one
frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame, it should
use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority messages can
be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

92 Developer Information
Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data block.
The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.

Destination device (uint8)


Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual devices
are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate a broadcast
message to all devices.

Command length (uint8)


The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length of
the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of the
header or any trailing padding bytes.

Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message type
being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they do not
understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands that apply to
multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are device specific.

Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set to zero.

Command data (uint8[])


The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format of
the data section is defined by the command itself.

Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes. Any padding
bytes are NOT included in the command length.

Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to determine
which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant or unknown
commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

93 Developer Information
Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration

Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.

Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters
available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters.
Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters that apply to multiple
types of devices.

Data type (uint8)


The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length is
used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message must
contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

94 Developer Information
128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.

Operation type (uint8)


The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified parameter.
Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type. This
operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other value
for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be clamped
according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through 255
are available for device specific purposes..

Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of
elements.

The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

95 Developer Information
Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

0.0

1.0

Interpretation

.0

Focus

fixed16

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

0.0=near, 1.0=far

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))

.3

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

trigger instantaneous auto aperture

.6

Optical image stabilisation

boolean

true=enabled, false=disabled

Video mode

int8

trigger instantaneous autofocus

1
.0

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] = dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k DCI,


6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

96 Developer Information
Group

ID

Audio

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Mic level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.1

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic level


input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6
Output

Parameter

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides


Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

97 Developer Information
Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

Reserved

Interpretation

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

98 Developer Information
Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus on 8


camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on camera 4


(10 ms = 10000 us = 0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01

select 1080p 23.98 mode on all


cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma adjust for


green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

16

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

76

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

Assistance

99 Assistance
Obtenir de l'assistance
Le moyen le plus rapide d'obtenir de l'aide est d'accder aux pages d'assistance en ligne de Blackmagic
Design et de consulter les dernires informations de support concernant votre camra.

Pages d'assistance en ligne de Blackmagic Design


Les dernires versions du manuel, du logiciel et des informations d'assistance peuvent tre consultes sur le
centre d'assistance de Blackmagic Design : www.blackmagicdesign.com/support.

Contacter le service d'assistance de Blackmagic Design


Si vous ne parvenez pas trouver l'aide dont vous avez besoin dans notre matriel de support, veuillez utiliser
l'option Envoyez-nous un email disponible sur la page d'assistance de votre camra pour envoyer une
demande d'assistance par email. Vous pouvez galement cliquer sur le bouton Trouver un support technique
situ sur la page d'assistance et contacter ainsi le centre de support technique Blackmagic Design le plus
proche de chez vous.

Vrification du logiciel actuel


Pour vrifier quelle version du logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility est installe sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez la
fentre intitule About Blackmagic Camera Utility.
Sur Mac OS X, ouvrez le Blackmagic Camera Utility partir du dossier Applications. Slectionnez
About Blackmagic Camera Utility dans le menu d'application pour connatre le numro de version.
Sur Windows, ouvrez le logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility dans votre menu de Dmarrage ou sur
lcran de Dmarrage. Cliquez sur le menu Aide et slectionnez About Blackmagic Camera Utility
pour connatre le numro de version.

Comment obtenir les dernires mises jour du logiciel


Aprs avoir vrifi la version du logiciel Blackmagic Camera Utility installe sur votre ordinateur, veuillez visiter
le Centre dassistance Blackmagic ladresse suivante www.blackmagicdesign.com/support pour vrifier
les dernires mises jour. Mme s'il est gnralement conseill d'excuter les dernires mises jour, il est
prudent dviter deffectuer une mise jour logicielle au milieu d'un projet important.

Remplacement de la batterie
La batterie intgre de la Studio Camera nest pas rparable par lutilisateur. Si la batterie doit tre remplace,
vous devrez lexpdier au centre dassistance Blackmagic Design le plus proche. Si la camra nest plus couverte
par la garantie, le remplacement de la batterie se fera moyennant des frais de services minimaux pour le cot
de la batterie, le travail ralis et la rexpdition de votre camra. Veuillez contacter le service dassistance de
Blackmagic Design pour de plus amples informations sur lexpdition de votre camra, comment l'emballer
en toute scurit et les frais de remplacement de la batterie dans votre pays.

Garantie

100 Garantie
Garantie limite 12 mois
Par la prsente, Blackmagic Design garantit que ce produit sera exempt de dfauts matriels et de fabrication
pendant une dure de un an compter de la date d'achat. Si un produit savre dfectueux pendant la priode
de garantie, Blackmagic Design peut, sa seule discrtion, rparer le produit dfectueux sans frais pour les
pices et la main doeuvre, ou le remplacer en change du produit dfectueux.
Pour se prvaloir du service offert en vertu de la prsente garantie, il vous incombe dinformer Blackmagic
Design de lexistence du dfaut avant expiration de la priode de garantie, et de prendre les mesures
ncessaires pour lexcution des dispositions de ce service. Le consommateur a la responsabilit de soccuper
de lemballage et de l'expdition du produit dfectueux au centre de service nommment dsign par
Blackmagic Design, en frais de port prpay. Il incombe au Consommateur de payer tous les frais de transport,
dassurance, droits de douane et taxes et toutes autres charges relatives aux produits qui nous auront t
retourns et ce quelle que soit la raison.
La prsente garantie ne saurait en aucun cas sappliquer des dfauts, pannes ou dommages causs par
une utilisation inapproprie ou un entretien inadquat ou incorrect. Blackmagic Design na en aucun cas
lobligation de fournir un service en vertu de la prsente garantie : a) pour rparer les dommages rsultant
de tentatives de rparations, dinstallations ou tous services effectus par du personnel non qualifi par
Blackmagic Design, b) pour rparer tout dommage rsultant d'une utilisation inadquate ou d'une connexion
du matriel incompatible, c) pour rparer tout dommage ou dysfonctionnement caus par lutilisation de
pices ou de fournitures nappartenant pas la marque de Blackmagic Design, d) pour examiner un produit
qui a t modifi ou intgr dautres produits quand limpact dune telle modification ou intgration
augmente les dlais ou la difficult dexaminer ce produit. CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTE GARANTIE
EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN ET SES REVENDEURS DCLINENT EXPRESSEMENT
TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE COMMERCIALISATION OU D'ADAPTATION DANS QUELQUE BUT QUE
CE SOIT. LA RESPONSABILIT DE BLACKMAGIC DESIGN POUR RPARER OU REMPLACER UN PRODUIT
S'AVRANT DFECTUEUX CONSTITUE LA TOTALIT ET LE SEUL RECOURS EXCLUSIF PRVU ET FOURNI
AU CONSOMMATEUR POUR TOUT DOMMAGE INDIRECT, SPCIFIQUE, ACCIDENTEL OU CONSCUTIF,
PEU IMPORTE QUE BLACKMAGIC DESIGN OU SES REVENDEURS AIENT T INFORMS OU SE SOIENT
RENDUS COMPTE AU PRALABLE DE L'VENTUALIT DE CES DOMMAGES. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN NE
PEUT TRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DE TOUTE UTILISATION ILLICITE OU ABUSIVE DU MATRIEL PAR
LE CONSOMMATEUR. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN N'EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES RSULTANT
DE L'UTILISATION DE CE PRODUIT. LE CONSOMMATEUR MANIPULE CE PRODUIT A SES SEULS RISQUES.
Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design. Tous droits rservs. 'Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub, Multibridge
Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity et Leading the creative video revolution sont des marques dposes aux USA et dans d'autres pays.
Tous les autres noms de socit et de produits peuvent tre des marques dposes de leurs socits respectives auxquelles ils sont associs.

Installations- und Bedienungsanleitung

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X
Windows

Deutsch

Oktober 2014

Willkommen
Danke, dass Sie sich fr eine Blackmagic Studio Camera entschieden haben!
Auch wir sind restlos vom Design der Blackmagic Studio Camera begeistert. Schon
als Teenager war ich Feuer und Flamme fr die Liveproduktion weil sie so spannend
ist! Klassische Kameras mit Talkback und Tally waren frher extrem teuer und derart
sperrig, dass sie schwer zu handhaben waren. Dieses Problem wollten wir mit einer
kompakteren Kamera mit all den Talkback-, Tally- und Kamerabedienungsfunktionen
von physisch erheblich greren Kameras ausrumen.
Deshalb haben wir die Blackmagic Studio Camera entwickelt. Unser Ziel war der
Bau einer viel kleineren, besser tragbaren Kamera. Aber normalerweise haben
kleine Kameras auch kleine Bildschirme. Das war nicht Sinn der Sache. Was wir
wirklich wollten, war ein viel grerer Sucher! Das Resultat ist die Blackmagic Studio
Camera, die kleinste unter den Broadcast-Kameras, aber mit einem bergroen
Sucher ausgerstet. Damit arbeitet es sich wunderbar. Die przise Fokussierung und
die Bildausschnittswahl werden mit einem derart groen Sucher zum Kinderspiel.
Selbstverstndlich ist die Kamera auch mit Tally-Indikatoren und einem
leistungsfhigen eingebauten Akku ausgestattet. Und natrlich ist auch
die eigentlich Kamera von ausgezeichneter Qualitt und gibt Ihnen zudem
einen flexiblen MFT-Objektivanschluss. Alles was Sie brauchen in einem
kompletten Paket! Sie knnen grere Mikrofone mit Windschutz und sogar
Phantomspeisung anschlieen. Mit dem eingebauten Glasfaseranschluss ist der
Betrieb Ihrer Kamera aus kilometerweiter Entfernung von Ihrem Mischer mglich.
Bei Bedarf knnen Sie sogar zustzlich ein HyperDeck Shuttle anschlieen und
die Kamera fr anderweitige Produktionszwecke benutzen.
Wir wnschen Ihnen kreatives Schaffen mit Ihrer neuen Kamera und sind sehr
gespannt auf Ihre Liveproduktionen und sonstige filmische Arbeit!

Grant Petty

CEO Blackmagic Design

Inhaltsverzeichnis

Blackmagic Studio Camera

104 
Erste Schritte

118 
Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control

Einleitung Blackmagic Studio Camera 104

Die Kamerasteuerung Camera Control" vorgestellt 118

Anbringen eines Objektivs 106

Arbeiten mit Camera Control" (Kamerasteuerung) 119

Einschalten Ihrer Kamera 106

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


(DaVinci Resolve Tool fr die primre Farbkorrektur) 121

107 
Anschlsse
Blackmagic Studio Camera linke Seite 107
Blackmagic Studio Camera rechte Seite 108

109 
Kamera-Einstellungen

Synchronisation von Einstellungen  123

124 
Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol 124
Overview124

Kamera-Einstellungen109

Assumptions124

Audio-Einstellungen110

Blanking Encoding 124

Einstellungen fr das Monitoring 111

Message Grouping 124

Studio-Einstellungen112
Anpassen der Einstellungen 113
Zustzliche Einstellungen 114

115 
Videoausgang der Kamera
Anschlieen von Videomischern 115
Anschlieen von Aufzeichnungsgerten 115

116 
Blackmagic Camera Utility (Dienstprogramm)
117 
Befestigen von Zubehr
Gegenlichtblende117
Weiteres Zubehr 117

132 
Hilfe
133 
Garantie

Erste Schritte

104 Erste Schritte


Einleitung Blackmagic Studio Camera

Funktionsmerkmale
1. VORDERES TALLY-LICHT
Zeigt den Darstellern an, welche Kamera sich gegenwrtig auf Sendung befindet. Siehe Seite 111.
2. LANC-FERNBEDIENUNG
Der 2,5 mm Klinkenstecker fr die LANC-Fernbedienung untersttzt Blenden-, Zoom- und Fokussiersteuerung.
Siehe Seite 107.
3. LUFTFAHRT-KOPFHRER
0,25" TRS-Klinkenstecker fr das Monitoring von PGM (Programm) und Audio von der Steuerzentrale mit
Luftfahrt-Headsets. Siehe Seite 107.
4. MIKROFON-KOPFHRER-EINGANG
0,206" TRS-Klinkenstecker fr die Kommunikation mit der Steuerzentrale ber Luftfahrt-Headsets. Siehe Seite 107.
5. AUDIOEINGNGE
2 x 1/4" symmetrische XLR-Buchsen fr die Audioeingabe. Siehe Seite 107.
2

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

PUSH

12V

10

6. GLASFASER-EINGANG/AUSGANG
Der Glasfaser-Eingang und -Ausgang erlaubt Kabellngen von bis zu 45 Kilometern. Siehe Seite 108.
7. SDI OUT
SDI-Ausgang zum Anschluss an einen Mischer oder andere Gerte. Siehe Seite 108.
8. SDI IN
ber den SDI-Eingang kann der Kamerabediener das ausgegebene Programm (PGM) betrachten. Siehe Seite 108.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

9. REFERENZEINGANG
Erlaubt die Synchronisierung mehrerer Kameras mit Genlock ber ein Blackburst- oder Tri-Level-Referenzsignal.
Siehe Seite 108.
10. STROMVERSORGUNG
12 24 V Buchse fr die Stromversorgung und zum Aufladen des Akkus. Siehe Seite 108.

PUSH

105 Erste Schritte


PUSH

11

11. 10-Zoll LCD


Fr das Monitoring der Live-Kameraausgabe oder Programmausgabe, oder zur Menansicht. Siehe Seite 111.

12

12. HINTERES TALLY-LICHT


Im erleuchteten Zustand zeigt es dem Kamerabediener an, dass seine Kamera gegenwrtig auf Sendung ist.
13. FOKUS-TASTE (FOCUS)
Einmaliges Drcken zur automatischen Scharfeinstellung (Autofokus) oder zweimaliges Drcken zur Anzeige
von Focus Peaking auf dem LCD. Siehe Seite 113.

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

14. IRIS-TASTE
Einmaliges Drcken fr Belichtungsautomatik (Auto Exposure). Siehe Seite 113.
15 PUSH-TO-TALK-TASTE (PTT)
Taste zum Sprechen gedrckt halten. Zweimaliges Drcken der PPT-Taste in schneller Folge ermglicht die
handfreie Kommunikation. Erneutes Drcken bringt das standardmige Verhalten zurck. Siehe Seite 114.

22

16. PROGRAMM-TASTE (PGM)


Das Drcken dieser Taste bewirkt den Wechsel zwischen der Live-Kameraausgabe und der Programmausgabe
von einer Mischer-Steuerzentrale. Siehe Seite 114.
23

17. LOOK-UP-TABLE-TASTE (LUT)


Gegenwrtig nicht ausgefhrt.
18. MEN-NAVIGATIONSTASTEN
Zur Navigation des Mens auf dem LCD. Siehe Seite 114.
19. BESTTIGUNGS-TASTE (SET)
Besttigen Sie mit dieser Taste Ihre im Men getroffene Auswahl. Siehe Seite 114.
20. DISPLAY-TASTE
Das Drcken dieser Taste schaltet eingeblendete Overlays ein oder aus. Siehe Seite 114.
21. MEN-TASTE (MENU)
Erlaubt den Zugriff auf das Men auf dem LCD. Siehe Seite 114.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

22. EIN- UND AUSSCHALTTASTE


Die Blackmagic Studio Camera wird per Druck auf die Power-Taste eingeschaltet. Halten Sie diese Taste zum
Ausschalten der Kamera gedrckt. Siehe Seite 106 und 114.

SDI IN

23. USB-BUCHSE
USB-Mini-B-Port zur Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware. Siehe Seite 116.

REF

12V

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

106 Erste Schritte


Anbringen eines Objektivs
Um die Arbeit mit Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera aufzunehmen, brauchen Sie nichts weiter tun, als ein
Objektiv anzubringen und die Kamera einzuschalten. Halten Sie zum Entfernen der Staubschutzkappe vom
Objektivanschluss die Verriegelungstaste gedrckt und drehen Sie dann die Kappe gegen den Uhrzeigersinn
bis sie sich lst. Wir empfehlen, Ihre immer auszuschalten, ehe Sie ein Objektiv anbringen oder abnehmen.
So bringen Sie ein Objektiv an:

PUSH

PUSH

Schritt 1. Richten Sie den Punkt an Ihrem Objektiv auf die Ansetzmarkierung an der Kamera aus.
Bei vielen Objektiven ist dieser Punkt blau, rot oder wei und manche Objektive sind auf andere
Weise markiert.
Schritt 2.

Drehen Sie das Objektiv im Uhrzeigersinn, bis es einrastet.

Schritt 3.

Halten Sie zum Abnehmen des Objektivs die Verriegelungstaste gedrckt, drehen Sie das
Objektiv gegen den Uhrzeigersinn, bis der Punkt bzw. die Ansetzmarkierung die 12-Uhr-Position
erreicht hat und nehmen Sie das Objektiv vorsichtig ab.

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

So wird ein Objektiv an die Studio Camera angebracht


bzw. entfernt

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

Laden Sie den eingebauten Akku mit dem mitgelieferten


Netzteil auf und schalten Sie die Kamera ein

Wenn kein Objektiv an der Kamera angebracht ist, liegt der Sensor frei und kann leicht durch Staub oder
andere Ablagerungen verschmutzt werden. Deswegen empfiehlt es sich, die Staubschutzkappe mglichst
stndig an der Kamera zu belassen.

Einschalten Ihrer Kamera


Die Studio Camera ist mit einem eingebauten Akku ausgestattet, der sich ber das mitgelieferte Netzteil
aufladen lsst. Die Kamera kann bei Anschluss an eine externe Stromquelle aufgeladen und betrieben werden.
Sie wechselt unterbrechungsfrei zwischen Stromquellen hin und her.
Schritt 1.

Drcken Sie die Einschalttaste unter dem LCD. Dann erscheint das Live-Kamerabild auf
dem LCD.

Schritt 2.

Halten Sie die Einschalttaste gedrckt, um die Kamera auszuschalten.

Anschlsse

107 Anschlsse
Blackmagic Studio Camera linke Seite
LANC-Fernbedienung
ber den Remote-Port Ihrer Kamera lassen sich bei Einsatz eines kompatiblen Objektivs die Fokussierung,
Blenden- und Zoomeinstellungen des Objektivs fernsteuern. Der Port ist eine 2,5-mm-Stereoklinkenbuchse
und verwendet das LANC-Standardprotokoll.
Aktive MFT-Objektive gestatten Ihnen, den Zoomservo per LANC-Fernbedienung zu steuern. Folgende
Objektive werden zurzeit untersttzt:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42 mm f/3,5-5,6 Objektiv mit Power O.I.S (Bildstabilisator)
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175 mm f/4,0-5,6 Zoomobjektiv mit O.I.S.
Olympus 12-50 mm f/3,5-6,3 ED M.Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3 Objektiv

Kopfhrerausgang
Ausgang fr das Monitoring von Programm und Audio der Steuerzentrale ber Luftfahrt-Headsets mit Fixed
Wing"-Steckern. Das Angebot von Luftfahrt-Headsets reicht von Ohrhrermodellen fr Studioumgebungen bis
hin zu kompletten, lrmreduzierenden Modellen zum Einsatz bei lauten Konzerten und Sportveranstaltungen.
Das Audio wird den Kanlen 15 und 16 des eingehenden SDI- oder Glasfaser-Videos entnommen. Da die
Kanle 15 und 16 nur in den seltensten Fllen whrend der Produktion eingesetzt werden, bieten sie sich zum
Einsatz fr Audio-Talkback an.

Mikrofon-Kopfhrer-Eingang

PUSH

Dieser Eingang ermglicht die Kommunikation mit der Steuerzentrale ber Luftfahrt-Headsets. Das Audio wird
in die Kanle 15 und 16 der an die Steuerzentrale zurckgehenden SDI-oder Glasfaser-Ausgabe eingebettet.

Audioeingnge
3
2

PUSH

Zwei Kanle professionelles symmetrisches Analogaudio werden via XLR-Buchsen untersttzt. Stellen Sie die
Eingabepegel fr die beiden Kanle ber das Audiomen ein. Die Eingnge untersttzen ebenso Mikrofonpegelwie auch Leitungspegel-Eingaben. Die Eingabeart wird ebenfalls auf dem Audiomen ausgewhlt. Audio
wird in Kanal 1 und 2 des SDI-Datenflusses eingebettet.

108 Anschlsse
Blackmagic Studio Camera rechte Seite
Glasfaser-Eingang/Ausgang
Der Glasfaser-Eingang und -Ausgang ist mit branchenblichen LC-Buchsen ausgestattet. Beide untersttzen
3G-SDI an der Studio Camera HD sowie 6G-SDI an der Studio Camera 4K. Glasfaserkabel sind berall
erhltlich, da sie auch fr Computervernetzungen benutzt werden. Mit Glasfaserkabeln lassen sich Signale
ber Entfernungen von bis zu 45 km bermitteln. Mehr als genug fr die meisten Auenbertragungen,
einschlielich der komplexesten. Wenn an beide Glasfaser- und SDI-Eingnge ein Gert angeschlossen ist,
wird die Ausgabe des zuerst angeschlossenen Gerts verwendet.

SDI-Ausgang (SDI Out)


Verwenden Sie die SDI Out"-Buchse, um 10-Bit Videodaten in 4:2:2 an professionelles SDI-Equipment wie
Kreuzschienen, Monitore, SDI-Erfassungsgerte und Broadcast-Mischer auszugeben. Die Blackmagic Studio
Camera HD untersttzt 3G-SDI, und die Studio Camera 4K untersttzt 12G-SDI.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

SDI In
ber den SDI-Eingang kann der Kamerabediener das ausgegebene Programm (PGM) betrachten. Drcken
Sie einfach die PGM-Taste, um zwischen der Live-Kameraausgabe und der Programmausgabe von einer
Mischer-Steuerzentrale umzuschalten. Wenn an beide Glasfaser- und SDI-Eingnge Gerte angeschlossen
sind, wird die Ausgabe des zuerst angeschlossenen Gerts verwendet. Wird mit der Studio Camera auf ein
anderes Gert aufgezeichnet, beispielsweise ein Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, lsst sich der Ausgang
des Hyperdecks an den SDI-Eingang der Kamera anschlieen. Dies erlaubt die Wiedergabe des soeben
aufgezeichneten Filmmaterials.

Referenzeingang

12V

Erlaubt die Synchronisierung mehrerer Kameras mit Genlock ber ein Blackburst- oder Tri-Level-Referenzsignal.
Die Genlock-Synchronisierung von Kameras mit einem externen Referenzsignal verhindert Zeitversatzfehler,
die beim Umschalten zwischen verschiedenen Kameras zu strenden Bildbewegungen fhren knnen.

Stromversorgung
Schlieen Sie Ihr Netzteil ber die 12 24 V Buchse an und laden Sie den eingebauten Akku auf. Der voll
aufgeladene Akku gibt der Studio Camera HD eine Betriebsdauer von rund vier Stunden und der Studio
Camera 4K bis zu drei Stunden.

KameraEinstellungen

109 Kamera-Einstellungen
Kamera-Einstellungen
Drcken Sie die MENU-Taste (Men), um die Einstellungen Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera zu konfigurieren.
Benutzen Sie die Navigationstasten, um Mens zu aktivieren, und die SET-Taste, um Ihre Auswahl zu besttigen.

Videoformat
Whlen Sie das gewnschte Videoausgabeformat aus. Bitte entnehmen Sie die untersttzten Formate der
linksseitig abgebildeten Tabelle.

Lichter (Gain)
Gain-Einstellungen sind beim Filmen in Verhltnissen mit geringem Licht hilfreich. Der voreingestellte Wert
betrgt 0dB. Der Gain-Wert lsst sich in Schritten von jeweils 6dB bis zu +18dB steigern.

Weiabgleich (White Balance)


Es stehen sechs Weiabgleich-Voreinstellungen fr verschiedene Farbtemperaturverhltnisse zur Verfgung.
3200 K fr Tungstenlicht
4500 K fr Neonlicht
5000 K, 5600 K, 6500 K und 7500 K fr verschiedenartige Tageslichtverhltnisse, z. B. je nach
Tageszeit und Witterung.

Kameraeinstellungen

Verschlusszeit (Shutter Speed)

Untersttzte Videoformate
Studio Camera HD
und Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

Die Verschlusszeit gibt zusammen mit der ISO-Einstellung die Lichtmenge vor, die auf den Sensor gelassen
wird. Es sind 15 verschiedene Verschlusszeiten von 1/50 sec bis 1/2000 sec verfgbar.

Dynamikumfang
Film
Bei Einstellung des Dynamikumfangs der Studio Camera HD auf Film"-Modus werden die in Ihrem Vidoesignal
enthaltenen Daten durch eine Log-Gammakurve optimiert. So knnen Sie leichter das Beste aus Ihrer
Farbkorrektursoftware, beispielsweise DaVinci Resolve, herausholen.
Video
Im Videomodus arbeiten die Studio Camera HD und die Studio Camera 4K mit dem REC709-Standard, der
mit modernem Studioequipment kompatibel ist.

Sprache (Language)
Die voreingestellte Sprache ist Englisch. In Zukunft werden auch zustzliche Sprachen wie Japanisch, Franzsisch,
Deutsch, Russisch, Spanisch, Chinesisch und Koreanisch untersttzt.

110 Kamera-Einstellungen
Audio-Einstellungen
Drcken Sie zur Vorgabe der Eingangs- und Audiokontrolleinstellungen Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera die
MEN-Taste (MENU) und whlen Sie das links vom Display angezeigte Mikrofon-Symbol aus.

Audioeingang
Schaltet zwischen dem Einsatz der Buchsen des internen Mikrofons und den XLR-Audiobuchsen der Kamera um.

Mikrofonpegel
Der Mikrofoneingang passt die Aufnahmepegel des eingebauten Mikrofons an. Schieben Sie zum Erhhen
oder Verringern der Pegel den Audio-Schieberegler nach links oder rechts. Die Studio Camera weist ein
eingebautes Stereomikrofon auf. Wenn keine externe Audioquelle angeschlossen ist, zeichnet das eingebaute
Mikrofon auf die Audiokanle 1 und 2 auf.

Eingangspegel
Externe Audioanschlsse untersttzen Audio auf Mikrofon- oder Leitungspegel. Whlen Sie Line", um externe
Audiogerte wie beispielsweise einen Tonmixer oder Verstrker anzuschlieen. Geben Sie je nach der Signalstrke
Ihres Mikrofons die Einstellung Mic Low" (niedrig) oder Mic High" (hoch) vor. Es ist wichtig, den passenden
Pegel auszuwhlen, damit vermieden wird, dass Ihr Audio kaum hrbar oder zu laut und verzerrt klingt.
Audio-Einstellungen

Stellen Sie die externen Audioeingangspegel mithilfe der linken und rechten Pfeiltasten ein.

Eingangspegel Kanal 1 (Ch 1 Input)


Schieben Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel fr Kanal 1 das Audio-Schiebereglersymbol nach
links oder rechts. Externe Audioeingaben haben Vorrang vor dem eingebauten Mikrofon und werden auf
Audiokanal 1 ausgegeben.

Eingangspegel Kanal 2 (Ch 2 Input)


Schieben Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel fr Kanal 2 das Audio-Schiebereglersymbol nach
links oder rechts. Externe Audioeingaben haben Vorrang vor dem eingebauten Mikrofon und werden auf
Audiokanal 2 ausgegeben.

Phantomspeisung (Phantom Power)


Aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie Phantom Power" fr beide externe XLR-Anschlsse, indem Sie zum Audio-Men
navigieren und dort mithilfe der Pfeiltasten On" (Aktiv) bzw. Off" (Inaktiv) auswhlen. Phantomspeisung ist eine
Methode der Stromversorgung ber Mikrofonkabel. Am gngigsten ist ihr Einsatz als bequeme Stromquelle
fr Kondensator-Mikrofone. Warten Sie mindestens 10 Sekunden ab, damit sich die Phantomspeisung entladen
kann, ehe sie ein Mikrofon mit eigener Stromversorgung anschlieen. ltere Bndchenmikrofone sind nicht
fr die Phantomspeisung geeignet.
Wenn die Einstellung Line" (Leitungspegel) ausgewhlt ist, wird die Phantomspeisung ausgeschaltet.

111 Kamera-Einstellungen
Einstellungen fr das Monitoring
Drcken Sie die MEN-Taste (MENU) und whlen Sie das Monitor-Symbol aus, um die Display-Einstellungen
des LCD vorzugeben.

Helligkeit (Brightness)
Bewegen Sie das Schiebereglersymbol nach links oder rechts, um die Helligkeitseinstellungen des LCD
anzupassen. Die Helligkeit ist auf 60 % voreingestellt.

Zebra
Blackmagic-Kameras sind mit einer Zebra-Funktion ausgestattet, die Aufschluss ber die Belichtungsstrken
gibt. Ein diagonales Linienmuster erscheint ber jedem Videobereich, der die Zebra-Belichtungsstrke
berschreitet.
Schalten Sie Zebra ein und whlen Sie mithilfe der linken und rechten Pfeiltasten den gewnschten ZebraWarnpegel aus. Es ist ein Mittelwert voreingestellt.

Focus Peaking

Einstellungen fr das Monitoring

Erlaubt die Einstellung des Pegels fr Focus Peaking. Verfgbare Einstellungen sind: Off" (ausgeschaltet),
Low" (niedrig), Medium" (Mittelwert) und High" (hoch). Passen Sie diese Einstellung an, wenn Sie ein
extrem scharfes Objektiv benutzen und das ganze Bild Peaking-Anzeigen verursacht. Focus Peaking ist auf
einen Mittelwert voreingestellt.

Helligkeit des Tally-Lichts (Tally Brightness)


ndert die Helligkeit des vorderen Tally-Lichts. Verfgbare Einstellungen sind: Low" (niedrig), Medium"
(Mittelwert) und High" (hoch). Die Helligkeit ist auf einen Mittelwert voreingestellt.

112 Kamera-Einstellungen
Studio-Einstellungen
Drcken Sie die MEN-Taste (MENU) und whlen Sie das Kopfhrer-Symbol aus, um die Display-Einstellungen
des LCD vorzugeben.

Kameranummer (Camera Number)


Wenn Ihre Studio Camera Tally-Signale von einem ATEM-Mischer empfangen soll, mssen Sie auf Ihrer
Kamera zunchst eine Kameranummer vorgeben. Dies gewhrleistet, dass der Mischer das Tally-Signal an
die richtige Kamera bermittelt. Die Kameranummer kann auf einen Wert zwischen 1 99 eingestellt werden.
Die Nummer 1 ist voreingestellt.

Referenzquelle (Reference Source)


Dient zur Auswahl der Genlock-Quelle. Die Studio Camera kann Genlock am Programm-SDI-Eingang oder
von einer externen Genlock-Quelle einsetzen. Bereiten Sie sich bei Verwendung einer externen GenlockQuelle darauf vor, dass der Wechsel der Quelle hchstwahrscheinlich zu einer Strung beim Synchronisieren
der Kamera fhren wird.

Referenzzeitvorgabe (Reference Timing)


Erlaubt Ihnen die manuelle Abstimmung der Referenzzeitvorgabe nach Zeilen oder Pixeln.
Studio-Einstellungen

Headset-Lautstrke (Headset Level)


Bewegen Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Pegel fr das Audio-Monitoring den Lautstrke-Schieberegler
nach links oder rechts. Die Lautstrke ist auf 50 % voreingestellt.

Lautstrke des Headset-Mikrofons (Headset Mic Level)


Bewegen Sie zum Erhhen oder Verringern der Audio-Eingabepegel des Mikrofons den Lautstrke-Schieberegler
nach links oder rechts. Die Lautstrke ist auf 50 % voreingestellt.

Programm-Mix (Program Mix)


ndert das Lautstrkeverhltnis von Kameraton zu Talkback-Ton. Die Kopfhrer geben den jeweils auf dem
LCD angezeigten Ton aus. Beispiel: Wenn Sie sich in Kameraansicht befinden, ist der Ton von der Kamera zu
hren. Befinden Sie sich jedoch in Programmansicht, so ist das Programmaudio zu hren. Die Voreinstellung
betrgt 0 %.

113 Kamera-Einstellungen
Anpassen der Einstellungen

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

Die Blackmagic Studio Camera untersttzt elektronische Blendensteuerung. Das erlaubt Ihnen,
Blendeneinstellungen wie die ffnungsweite und automatische Fokussierung anzupassen. Mit der FokusPeaking-Funktion werden die schrfsten Bildbereiche grn umrandet, damit Sie sich mhelos Ihrer Scharfstellung
vergewissern knnen. Fokus-Peaking ist ausschlielich auf dem LCD zu sehen und wirkt sich nicht auf die
SET
DISPLAY
MENU
SDI-Ausgabe
aus.

Fokus-Taste (Focus)
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Drcken Sie die FOCUS-Taste einmal, um automatisch zu


fokussieren. Durch zweimaliges Drcken der FOCUS-Taste in
schneller Folge wird Focus Peaking aktiviert

Drcken Sie bei Einsatz der Studio Camera mit einem Autofokus-Objektiv die Fokus-Taste (FOCUS) fr Focus
Peaking oder Autofokus. Drcken Sie die FOCUS-Taste einmal fr Autofokus. Durch zweimaliges Drcken der
FOCUS-Taste in schneller Folge aktivieren Sie Focus Peaking.
Drcken Sie die FOCUS-Taste bei Einsatz eines manuellen Objektivs einmal.

Iris- bzw. Objektivsteuerungstaste


Bei Verwendung der Dynamikumfang-Einstellungen fr Video" wird durch einmaliges Drcken der IRIS-Taste
eine durchschnittliche Belichtungszeit basierend auf der Helligkeitsverteilung in Ihrer Aufnahme eingestellt.
Bei Verwendung der Dynamikumfang-Einstellungen wird die Belichtung durch Drcken der IRIS-Taste auf
die hellsten Lichter in Ihrer Aufnahme eingestellt.
Um die Belichtung auf Ihrer Studio Camera manuell einzustellen, drcken Sie die Auf- und Abwrtsnavigationstasten.

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Drcken Sie die IRIS-Taste fr automatische Belichtung


oder stellen Sie die Belichtung mit den Auf- und
Abwrtsnavigationstasten manuell ein

DISPLAY

MENU

114 Kamera-Einstellungen
Zustzliche Einstellungen
Push to Talk (PTT)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

Bei Liveproduktionen ist es unverzichtbar, dass Kamerabediener mit dem Regisseur und anderen Mitwirkenden
in der Steuerzentrale sprechen knnen. Halten Sie einfach die PPT-Taste gedrckt und fangen Sie an zu
sprechen. Zweimaliges
Drcken
der PPT-Taste in schneller Folge ermglicht die handfreie Kommunikation.
DISPLAY
MENU
Erneutes Drcken bringt die standardmige Funktionsweise zurck.

Programm (PRM)
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Die Studio Camera verfgt ber Einstellungen wie PTT und


PGM, die fr die Liveproduktion unverzichtbar sind

Manchmal ist es wichtig, dass Kamerabediener auch die Programmausgabe und nicht blo die Ansicht von
den eigenen Kameras sehen knnen. Drcken Sie die PGM-Taste, um zwischen Live-Kameraausgabe und
der Programmausgabe von einer Mischer-Steuerzentrale umzuschalten. Ihre externe Videoquelle lsst sich
wahlweise ber den SDI- oder den Glasfasereingang anschlieen.

Look Up Table (LUT)


Gegenwrtig nicht ausgefhrt.

Pfeiltasten Links, Rechts, Aufwrts, Abwrts


Benutzen Sie diese Tasten fr die Mennavigation.

Set (Besttigen)
Besttigen Sie mit dieser Taste Ihre im Men getroffene Auswahl.

Display
Schaltet die auf dem LCD eingeblendeten Bildausschnittmarkierungen (Overlays) und Indikatoren fr die
verbleibende Akkulaufzeit ein und aus. Die SDI-Ausgabe ist frei von Overlays.

Menu (Men)
Drcken Sie diese Taste, um das Men aufzurufen und navigieren Sie mit den Pfeiltasten.

Power (Ein- und Ausschalter)


Die Blackmagic Studio Camera wird per Druck auf die Power-Taste eingeschaltet. Halten Sie diese Taste zum
Ausschalten der Kamera gedrckt.

Videoausgang der
Kamera

115 Videoausgang der Kamera


Anschlieen von Videomischern
Blackmagic Studio Cameras geben 10-Bit Videodaten in 4:2:2 aus, damit Sie Broadcast-Mischer und anderweitiges
SDI-Videoequipment anschlieen knnen. Der Glasfaser-Eingang und -Ausgang macht kameraseitige ATEM
Camera Converter berflssig.
Sie knnen die Programmausgabe (PGM) des Mischers mhelos sehen, indem Sie diesen Ausgang an den
SDI- oder Glasfaser-Eingang Ihrer Studio Camera anschlieen.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

Die Studio Camera verfgt auerdem ber einen Referenzeingang, der die Genlock-Synchronisierung mehrerer
Kameras mit einem Blackburst- oder Tri-Level-Referenzsignal erlaubt. Die Genlock-Synchronisierung von
Kameras, VTRs und anderen Gerten mit einem externen Referenzsignal verhindert Zeitversatzfehler, die
beim Umschalten zwischen verschiedenen Quellen zu strenden Bildbewegungen fhren knnen.

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Koppeln Sie Ihre Studio Camera wahlweise per SDI- oder


Glasfaserkabel an einen Produktionsmischer oder an ein
anderes Gert

REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

Schlieen Sie den SDI-Ausgang der Kamera an den SDIEingang des Hyperdecks an, und den SDI-Ausgang des
Hyperdecks an den SDI-Eingang der Kamera, um Ihr
aufgezeichnetes Material zu betrachten

12V

Anschlieen von Aufzeichnungsgerten


Wenn Sie die Ausgabe Ihrer Studio Camera einfach nur aufzeichnen mchten, knnen Sie den SDI-Ausgang
der Kamera an den SDI-Eingang eines SSD-Festplattenrekorders, beispielsweise eines Blackmagic Hyperdeck
Shuttle, anschlieen. Der SDI-Ausgang des Hyperdecks lsst sich wiederum an den SDI-Eingang der Studio
Camera anschlieen, sodass Sie Ihr aufgezeichnetes Material auf dem LCD der Kamera betrachten knnen.

Blackmagic Camera Utility


(Dienstprogramm)

PUSH

116 Blackmagic Camera Utility (Dienstprogramm)


PUSH

So aktualisieren Sie Ihre Kamerasoftware unter Mac OS X


Laden Sie die Blackmagic Camera Utility Software herunter, entpacken Sie die heruntergeladene Datei und
ffnen Sie das resultierende Datentrgersymbol, um den Inhalt zu enthllen.
Starten Sie das Programm Blackmagic Camera Installer und folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm.

So aktualisieren Sie Ihre Kamerasoftware unter Windows


Nach erfolgtem Download des Dienstprogramms Blackmagic Camera Utility und Entpacken der
heruntergeladenen Datei ist ein Ordner namens Blackmagic Camera Utility zu sehen, der eine PDF-Version
dieser Bedienungsanleitung und das Programm Blackmagic Camera Utility enhlt.
Doppelklicken Sie das Installationsprogramm und folgen Sie den auf dem Bildschirm angezeigten Aufforderungen
zur Fertigstellung der Installation.

So aktualisieren Sie Ihre Kamerasoftware

Blackmagic Camera Utility (Dienstprogramm)

Schlieen Sie Ihren Computer nach erfolgter Installation der Blackmagic Camera Utility mit einem USB-Kabel
an Ihre Kamera an. Der Mini-USB-2.0-Port befindet sich am Kameraboden.
Starten Sie das Dienstprogramm Blackmagic Camera Utility und folgen Sie der auf dem Bildschirm angezeigten
Aufforderung zur Aktualisierung der Kamerasoftware.

Der Mini-USB-2.0-Port befindet sich am Kameraboden

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Befestigen von
Zubehr

117 Befestigen von Zubehr


Gegenlichtblende
Die mit der Studio Camera gelieferte faltbare Gegenlichtblende dient zum Schutz des LCD vor grellem Licht,
damit das Display jederzeit klar erkennbar ist.
Schritt 1.

Legen Sie sich die im Lieferumfang Ihrer Studio Camera enthaltenen sechs Flgelschrauben zurecht.

Schritt 2.

Schieben Sie die Bohrlcher in der Gegenlichtblende ber die Befestigungspunkte an der
Kamera. Drehen Sie dann jeweils zwei der Flgelschrauben seitlich der Kamera und an ihrer
Ober- und Unterseite fest, bis die Gegenlichtblende sitzt.

Weiteres Zubehr
Fr Studionachrichten mag es wnschenswert sein, Ihre Kamera auf ein Rollstativ zu setzen und Schienen fr
gewichtige Broadcast-Objektive und Teleprompter anzubringen. Auenbertragungen hingegen mgen
den Anschluss von Mikrofonen, externen Akkus und LANC-Fernbedienungen erfordern. Die Kamera ist am
Boden mit zwei 3/8-Zoll-Befestigungspunkten und seitlich und oben mit zehn 1/4-Zoll Befestigungspunkten
versehen. Das gibt Ihnen die Flexibilitt, Ihr Rig fr Produktionen aller Gren umzubauen.
2

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

Arbeiten mit ATEM Software


Control

118 Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control


Die Kamerasteuerung Camera Control" vorgestellt
Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera lsst sich unter Einsatz der in der ATEM-Bediensoftware enthaltenen
Kamerasteuerungsfunktion (Camera Control) von einem ATEM-Mischer aus bedienen. Mit einem Klick auf die
Camera"-Schaltflche ffnet sich das Kamerasteuerungsfenster. Die Einstellungen fr Iris" (Blende), Gain" (Lichter)
und Focus" (Fokus) lassen sich bei Einsatz kompatibler Objektive bequem justieren. Sie knnen auch mehrere
Kameras farblich aufeinander abstimmen und mit DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector, dem Tool fr die primre
Farbkorrektur, einzigartige Optiken kreieren.
Mit der ATEM-Mischersteuerung werden Datenpakete zur Steuerung der Kamera ber alle nicht-abwrtskonvertierten
SDI-Ausgnge eines ATEM-Mischers bermittelt. Sie knnen also einen SDI-Ausgang Ihres ATEM-Mischers an den
Videoeingang der Kamera anschlieen. Da die Kamera die Steuerungspakete ber die SDI-Verbindung erkennt,
erlaubt dies die Funktionssteuerung direkt in der Kamera. Die Kamerabedienung kann ber regulre SDI- oder
Glasfaser-SDI-Verbindungen erfolgen.
ATEM Camera Control (ATEM-Kamerasteuerung)
PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

REMOTE
STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

HD

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

HD

PREVIEW

HD

3
L

+12V BACKUP
POWER

PUSH

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

STEREO
IN
PUSH

HD

HD

CH 1

CH 2

SDI OUT

MULTI-VIEW

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Schritt 1.
AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

IN

OUT

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

IN

PGM SDI

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

OUT

IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Anschluss mehrerer Blackmagic Studio Cameras via


Glasfaser mithilfe eines ATEM Studio Converters

PGM SDI

Verbinden Sie einen beliebigen SDI-Ausgang des ATEM-Mischers jedoch nicht die abwrtskonvertierten
oder Multi View"-Ausgnge mit dem SDI-Eingang (SDI In) Ihrer Studio Camera. Kamerasteuerungssignale
werden nicht ber die Multi View"-Ausgnge oder abwrtskonvertierte SDI-Ausgnge bermittelt.
All SDI and HDMI video connections are

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

CH 1CH 1

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

Drcken Sie die Men-Taste Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera. Navigieren Sie zu Studio Settings" > Camera
Number" (Studio-Einstellungen > Kameranummer) und stellen Sie diese analog zum Mischereingang ein.
Beispiel: Wenn Studio Camera 1 an den ATEM Mischereingang Cam 1" angeschlossen ist, muss auch
die Kameranummer auf 1 eingestellt sein. So wird das Tally-Signal an die richtige Kamera bermittelt.
ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Anschlieen via Glasfaser

SDI OUT

CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

PRESS TO TALK

SDI OUT

Schritt 3.

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

PUSH

HD

Schlieen Sie Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera an einen


beliebigen SDI-Eingang Ihres ATEM-Mischers an

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Schritt 2.

CH 1

SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

Koppeln Sie den SDI-Ausgang (SDI Out") Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera an den SDI-Eingang (SDI
In") eines ATEM Mischers.

LOCK TO TALK
IN
2

HDMI IN

Schritt 1.

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

Anschlieen via SDI

PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

MIC

H/PHONE

IN

Koppeln Sie den Optical Out/In"-Anschluss Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera an den Optical Out/
In"-Anschluss eines ATEM Studio Converters.

Schritt 2. Verbinden Sie einen geeigneten SDI-Ausgang des ATEM Studio Converters mit einem beliebigen SDI4
Eingang (SDI In) des ATEM-Mischers.
AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

Schritt 3.

SDI OUT

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

Schritt 4.

OUT

Verbinden Sie einen beliebigen SDI-Ausgang des ATEM-Mischers jedoch nicht die abwrtskonvertierten
oder Multi View"-Ausgnge mit dem SDI-Eingang (SDI In) des ATEM Studio Converters.
Kamerasteuerungssignale werden nicht ber die Multi View"-Ausgnge oder abwrtskonvertierte
SDI-Ausgnge bermittelt.
IN

OPTICAL OUT/IN

OUT

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Drcken Sie die Men-Taste Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera. Navigieren Sie zu Studio Settings" > Camera
Number" (Studio-Einstellungen > Kameranummer) und stellen Sie diese analog zum Mischereingang ein.
Beispiel: Wenn Studio Camera 1 an den ATEM Mischereingang Cam 1" angeschlossen ist, muss die Nummer
Ihrer Kamera ebenfalls auf 1 eingestellt sein. So wird das Tally-Signal an die richtige Kamera bermittelt.

ffnen Sie Preferences" (Voreinstellungen) in ATEM Software Control und belegen Sie die Tasten des Mischers so,
dass die jeweilige Kamera mit der richtigen Tally-Leuchte angezeigt wird. Jetzt wo eine Videoverbindung von Ihrem
Mischer zu Ihrer Blackmagic Studio Camera besteht, knnen Sie auch die Tally-Indikatoren an Ihrer Kamera nutzen
und per Druck der PGM-Taste Ihrer Kamera den Programm-Feed ansehen.

119 Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control


Arbeiten mit Camera Control" (Kamerasteuerung)

Klicken Sie auf das Einstellungssymbol, um Ihren AuxiliaryAusgang fr die Kamerasteuerung vorzugeben

Starten Sie die Bediensoftware ATEM Software Control und klicken Sie am unteren Rand der Benutzeroberflche auf
das Kamerasymbol. Nun erfolgt die Anzeige einer Zeile von gekennzeichneten Kamerafenstern mit leistungsfhigen
Tools zur Anpassung und Verfeinerung des Bildes der jeweiligen Kamera. Die Bedienelemente sind einfach handhabbar.
Klicken Sie die Symbole mit Ihrer Maus an oder nehmen Sie Anpassungen per Klick und einer Ziehbewegung vor.

Auswahl der zu steuernden Kameras (Camera Control Selection)


Die Schaltflchenzeile im oberen Bereich des Kamerasteuerungsfensters erlaubt Ihnen, die Nummer der zu steuernden
Kamera auszuwhlen. Wenn Sie mehrere Kameras haben, deren Anzeigen in das Fenster passen und ohne Scrollen sichtbar
sind, oder das Farbkorrekturfenster geffnet ist, knnen Sie ber diese Schaltflchen die jeweils zu steuernde Kamera
auswhlen. Bei Einsatz eines Aux-Ausgangs zur berwachung der Bedienung Ihrer Kamera bewirkt das Anklicken dieser
Schaltflchen neben dem Wechsel der zu steuernden Kamera auerdem, dass die von dieser Kamera ausgegebenen
Videosignale zu dem Aux-Ausgang, der in den Voreinstellungen des Mischers eingestellt ist, gesendet werden.

Kanalstatus
Der Kanalstatus im oberen Bereich der Kamerasteuerung zeigt die Kamerakennung, On-Air-Anzeige und eine
Sperrschaltflche an. Klicken Sie auf die Sperrschaltflche, um alle Steuerungen einer spezifischen Kamera zu sperren.
Wenn die Kamera auf Sendung ist, leuchtet der Kanalstatus rot auf und zeigt die On-Air-Warnung an.

Farbrad
Jedes Bedienelement zeigt den Kanalstatus an, damit ersichtlich
ist, welche Kamera sich auf Sendung befindet. Verwenden Sie
die Farbrder, um die Einstellungen der Schatten-, Mittel- und
Weitonwerte einzelner YRGB-Kanle zu justieren

Das Farbrad ist eine leistungsstarke Funktion des DaVinci Resolve Farbkorrektors zur Vornahme farblicher Anpassungen
an den Einstellungen fr Lift" (Schwarztne), Gamma" (Mitteltne) und Gain" (Weitne) einzelner YRGB-Kanle.
Die Auswahl der anzupassenden Einstellung erfolgt per Klick auf eine der drei ber dem Farbrad befindlichen
Auswahlschaltflchen.

Masterrad
Passen Sie mithilfe des nachstehenden Farbrades die Kontraste aller YRGB-Kanle auf einmal an oder justieren Sie nur
jeweils die Leuchtdichte der Einstellungen fr (Schwarztne), Gamma (Mitteltne) und Gain (Weitne).

Reset-Symbole
Anhand des rechts oben in allen Kamerafenstern befindlichen Reset-Symbols knnen Sie bequem auswhlen, welche
Farbkorrektureinstellungen zurckgesetzt, kopiert oder eingefgt werden sollen. Jedes Farbrad verfgt ber ein
zugehriges Reset-Symbol. Klicken Sie es an, um eine Einstellung auf ihren Standardwert zurckzusetzen oder um eine
zu kopieren bzw. einzufgen. Gesperrte Steuerelemente bleiben von der Einfgefunktion unberhrt.

Wird Paste to all" (In alle einfgen) angewendet, erscheint ein


Warnhinweis, der Sie auffordert, den Vorgang zu besttigen.
Dies soll das versehentliche Einfgen neuer Einstellungen fr auf
Sendung befindliche Kameras verhindern

Das Master-Resetsymbol oben rechts im Farbkorrektorfenster lsst Sie die Farbrder fr Lift, (Schwarztne), Gamma
(Mitteltne) und Gain (helle Bereiche) sowie die Einstellungen fr Contrast" (Kontrast), Hue" (Farbton), Saturation"
(Sttigung), und Lum Mix" (Luminanzmischung) zurcksetzen. Sie knnen Farbkorrektureinstellungen einzeln in
Kamerafenster kopieren oder dies fr einen durchgngigen Look fr alle Kameras auf einmal tun. Die Einstellungen fr
Blende, Coarse" und Schwarzwert bleiben von der Einfgefunktion unberhrt. Bei Anwendung von Paste to all" (In
alle einfgen) werden Sie durch einen Warnhinweis gebeten, den Vorgang zu besttigen. Dies soll das versehentliche
Einfgen neuer Einstellungen fr auf Sendung befindliche Kameras verhindern.

120 Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control


Blenden-/Schwarzwert-Steuerung
Blende und Schwarzwert werden ber den kreisfrmigen Button im Fadenkreuz der einzelnen Kamerafenster
gesteuert. Dieser Button leuchtet rot auf, wenn die Kamera auf Sendung ist.
Ziehen Sie den Button zum ffnen oder Schlieen der Blende nach oben oder unten. Bei gedrckt gehaltener
SHIFT-Taste ist nur der Blendenwert anpassbar.
Ziehen Sie den Button nach links oder rechts, um die Schwarztne zu vertiefen oder anzuheben. Bei gedrckt
gehaltener Command-Taste (Mac) bzw. gedrckt gehaltener Steuerungstaste (Windows) lsst sich der
Schwarzwert separat justieren.

Coarse"-Einstellung
Mit der links vom Blenden/Schwarzwert-Button angeordneten Coarse"-Einstellung lassen sich die zulssigen
Blendenwerte begrenzen. Diese Funktion hilft zu verhindern, dass berbelichtete Bilder auf Sendung gehen.
So stellen Sie den Coarse"-Grenzwert ein: ffnen Sie die Blende mithilfe der Blendensteuerung so weit
es geht. Setzen Sie dann die Coarse"-Einstellung nach oben oder unten, um den maximal zulssigen
Blendenwert einzustellen. Jetzt verhindert der Coarse"-Grenzwert beim Einstellen der Blende, dass Ihr
Blendenhchstwert berschritten wird.

Blenden-Indikator
Der links von der Blenden-/Schwarzwert-Steuerung befindliche Blenden-Indikator stellt den ffnungstatus
der Blende visuell dar. Der Blenden-Indikator wird durch die Coarse"-Einstellung beeinflusst.
Das Blenden-/Schwarzwert-Bedienelement leuchtet rot auf,
wenn die jeweilige Kamera On Air ist

Autofokus-Symbol
Jedes Kamerafenster weist unten links ein Autofokus-Symbol auf. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol, um bei
Einsatz eines Objekts mit elektronischer Blendensteuerung automatisch zu fokussieren. Wichtig: Die meisten
Objektive untersttzten elektronische Fokussierung. Stellen Sie jedoch bei Objektiven, die automatisch und
manuell fokussierbar sind, den Autofokusmodus ein. Bei manchen Objektiven erfolgt dies durch Vorwrtsoder Rckwrtsschieben des Fokussierrings.

Manuelle Fokuseinstellung
Mithilfe des unten in jedem Kamerasteuerungsfenster befindlichen Fokussierrings knnen Sie Ihre Kamera
manuell scharfstellen. Ziehen Sie den Fokussierring nach links oder rechts, um die Schrfe manuell einzustellen.
Prfen Sie dabei anhand des Videofeeds von der Kamera, ob Ihr Bild gewnscht scharf ist.

Klicken Sie zur Scharfstellung eines kompatiblen Objektivs auf


das Autofokus-Symbol oder ziehen Sie den Fokussier-Regler
nach rechts oder links

121 Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control


Kameraeinstellung Gain" (Lichter)
ber die Kameraeinstellung Gain" knnen Sie die von der Kamera wiedergegebenen hellen Tonwerte verstrken.
Wichtig ist dies beim Filmen in Niedriglichtsituationen, wenn eine Verstrkung der Lichter auf dem Niveau des Sensors
erwnscht ist, um eine Unterbelichtung Ihrer Aufnahmen zu vermeiden. Sie knnen Gain" abschwchen oder verstrken,
indem Sie den Pfeil links oder rechts von der Anzeige des dB-Wertes anklicken.
Bei Bedarf knnen Sie den Gain"-Wert verstrken. Beispielsweise bei Auendrehs wenn Sie Ihr Bild im schwcher
werden Licht eines Sonnenuntergangs aufhellen mchten. Zu beachten ist hierbei jedoch, dass mehr Gain" auch
strkeres Bildrauschen bewirkt.
Schieben Sie Ihren Mauszeiger ber die Anzeigen fr
Lichter, Verschlusszeit und Weiabgleich. ber die
nun angezeigten Pfeile lassen sich die jeweiligen
Einstellungen justieren

Verschlusszeit-Steuerung
Das Verschlusszeit-Bedienelement ist zwischen dem Farbrad und der Blenden-/Schwarzwert-Steuerung angeordnet.
Reduzieren oder erhhen Sie die Verschlusszeit, indem Sie Ihre Maus ber die Verschlusszeit-Anzeige schieben und
den linken oder rechten Pfeil anklicken.
Eventuelles Lichtflimmern lsst sich durch Senken der Verschlusszeit beseitigen. Durch eine niedrigere Verschlusszeit
lassen sich Ihre Bilder ohne Einsatz der Kameraeinstellung aufhellen, da der Bildsensor so lnger dem Licht ausgesetzt
wird. Eine hhere Verschlusszeit reduziert auch Bewegungsunschrfe und bietet sich daher fr gestochen scharfe
Action-Shots mit minimaler bewegungsbedingter Unschrfe an.

Weiabgleich
Die neben dem Verschlusszeitregler befindliche Einstellung fr den Weiabgleich wird per Klick auf die Rechts- bzw.
Linkspfeile beidseitig der Farbtemperaturanzeige angepasst. Verschiedene Lichtquellen geben unterschiedlich warme
oder kalte Farben aus, was Sie durch Anpassen des Weiabgleichs kompensieren knnen. So wird dafr gesorgt, dass
die Weitne in Ihrem Bild wei bleiben.

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


(DaVinci Resolve Tool fr die primre Farbkorrektur)
Wer mit Farbkorrektur vertraut ist, kann statt der fr Mischer gebruchlichen CCU-Benutzeroberflche der
Kamerasteuerung fr eine Benutzeroberflche optieren, die dem Tool fr die primre Farbkorrektor eines PostproduktionsGradingsystems gleicht.
Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera ist mit einem integrierten DaVinci Resolve Tool fr die primre Farbkorrektur ausgestattet.
Wenn Sie bereits mit DaVinci Resolve gearbeitet haben, knnen Sie Ihre dabei gesammelten Erfahrungen bei
Liveproduktionen fr kreatives Colorgrading mit der Blackmagic Studio Camera einsetzen, da dies genauso funktioniert.
Das Farbkorrekturfenster lsst sich von jedem Kamerasteuerungsfenster ausklappen und bietet eine erweiterte
Farbkorrektursteuerung mit zustzlichen Einstellungen und einer Bedienoberflche mit allen Tools fr die primre
Farbkorrektur.
Klicken Sie das DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector
Symbol an, um das Farbkorrekturfenster zu erweitern und
Einstellungen anzupassen

Zur Verfgung stehen Ihnen hier Farbrder und Einstellungen wie Sttigung, und die Einstellungen fr Schatten,
Mitteltne und Glanzlichter sind alle gleichzeitig sichtbar. Wechseln Sie einfach mithilfe der Kameraauswahl-Schaltflchen
oben im Fenster zwischen Kameras hin und her.

122 Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control


Farbrder
Die Schaltflchen Lift (Schwarztne), Gamma (Mitteltne) und Gain (Weitne) gestatten die Anpassung entlang des
gesamten Tonwertspektrums, selbst in sich berlappenden Bereichen. Im fotografischen Sinne versteht man unter
Lift", Gamma" und Gain" die Schatten, Mitten und Lichter.
So verwenden Sie die Farbrder, um feine oder rigorose Anpassungen vorzunehmen:

Schatten-, Mitten- und Lichter-Farbrder und das


Farbkorrektorfenster

Fhren Sie an beliebiger Stelle im Farbrad einen Klick und eine Ziehbewegung aus: Hinweis: Die
Farbbalance-Anzeige selbst braucht nicht bewegt zu werden. Die unter der Farbbalance-Anzeige gelegenen
RGB-Parameter verschieben sich analog zur Farbbalance-Justierung und reflektieren so an einzelnen Kanlen
vorgenommene Anpassungen.

Fhren Sie mittels Shift-Klick eine Ziehbewegung im Farbrad aus: Versetzt die Farbbalance-Anzeige auf
die absolute Position des Mauszeigers und gestattet die Vornahme schnellerer, extremerer Anpassungen.

Fhren Sie einen Doppelklick im Farbrad aus: Setzt die Farbanpassung zurck, ohne die Anpassung des
Masterrads fr dieses Steuerelement zu berhren.

Klicken Sie das Reset-Symbol oben rechts in einem Farbrad an: Dies setzt die Farbbalance zusammen
mit dem ihr zugehrigen Masterrad zurck.

Masterrder
Benutzen Sie die unter den Farbrdern befindlichen Masterrder, um die Lift"-, Gamma"- und Gain"-Steuerungen
fr jeden YRGB-Kanal individuell anzupassen.
So nehmen Sie Anpassungen mithilfe des Masterrads vor:

Passen Sie die Masterrder an, indem


Sie sie nach links oder rechts bewegen

Ziehen Sie das Masterrad nach links oder rechts: Durch Ziehen nach links wird der ausgewhlte Parameter
des Bildes verdunkelt, durch Ziehen nach rechts wird er erhellt. Wenn Sie eine Anpassung vornehmen, ndern
sich dabei die darunter liegenden YRGB-Parameter und reflektieren Ihre soeben vorgenommene Anpassung.
Fhren Sie bei gedrckt gehaltener ALT-Taste eine Ziehbewegung nach links oder rechts aus, um nur den
Y-Wert anzupassen. Da der Farbkorrektor sich der YRGB-Verarbeitung bedient, knnen Sie Ihre Kreativitt
ausleben und einzigartige Optiken allein durch Anpassung des Y-Kanals erzielen. Anpassungen am Y-Kanal
lassen sich am besten vornehmen, wenn die Lum Mix"-Einstellung fr YRGB-Verarbeitung nach rechts gesetzt
ist. Ist diese nach links gesetzt, erfolgt eine regulre RGB-Verarbeitung. Normalerweise arbeiten die meisten
DaVinci Resolve Coloristen mit dem YRGB-Farbkorrektor, da dieser mehr Mglichkeiten zur Steuerung der
Farbbalance bietet, ohne dabei die hellen Tonwerte (Gain") insgesamt zu beeinflussen. So kriegen Sie Ihren
gewollten Look schneller hin.

Kontrasteinstellung (Contrast")
Die Kontrasteinstellung (Contrast") lsst Sie die Spanne zwischen den dunkelsten und hellsten Tonwerten in einem
Bild steuern. Die erzielte Wirkung hnelt dem Einsatz der Lift"- und Gain"-Masterrder, um entgegengesetzte
Anpassungen vorzunehmen. Die Helligkeit ist auf 50 % voreingestellt.

Sttigungseinstellung (Saturation")
Ziehen Sie die Schieberegler nach rechts oder links,
um die Einstellungen fr Kontrast, Sttigung, Farbton
und Luminanzmischung anzupassen

Mit Saturation" (Sttigung) lsst sich der im Bild vorhandene Farbanteil erhhen oder senken. Die Helligkeit ist auf
50 % voreingestellt.

123 Arbeiten mit ATEM Software Control


Farbtoneinstellung (Hue")
Mit der Farbtoneinstellung (Hue") lassen sich alle in einem Bild auftretenden Farbtne um den gesamten
Umfang des Farbrads drehen. Die Standardeinstellung von 180 Grad zeigt die ursprngliche Farbtonverteilung
an. Die Steigerung bzw. Senkung dieses Wertes bewirkt, dass alle Farbtne gem der auf dem Farbrad
sichtbaren Farbtonverteilung gedreht werden.
Einstellungen fr Kontrast, Sttigung,
Farbton und Luminanzmischung

Einstellung Lum Mix" (Luminanzmischung)


Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera ist mit einem integrierten DaVinci Resolve Tool fr die primre Farbkorrektur
ausgestattet. DaVinci baut seit Anfang der 1980er Jahre Farbkorrektursysteme und es werden mit DaVinci
Resolve mehr Hollywood-Spielfilme gegradet als mit jeder anderen Applikation.
Das bedeutet fr Sie, dass der in Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera integrierte Farbkorrektor eine Reihe
einzigartiger Features mitbringt, die Ihren kreativen Spielraum erweitern. Eines dieser Leistungsmerkmale
ist die YRGB-Verarbeitung.
Fr das Colorgrading knnen Sie wahlweise RGB-Verarbeitung oder YRGB-Verarbeitung einsetzen. High-EndColoristen favorisieren YRGB-Verarbeitung, da diese mehr Kontrolle ber die Farbe gewhrt, die Anpassung
separater Kanle ermglicht und mehr kreative Mglichkeiten bietet.
Eine Einstellung von Lum Mix" ganz rechts bedeutet eine 100-prozentige Ausgabe des YRGB-Farbkorrektors.
Ist Lum Mix" ganz links eingestellt, bedeutet das eine 100-prozentige Ausgabe des RGB-Farbkorrektors. Lum
Mix" kann beliebig weit rechts- oder linksseitig eingestellt werden, um eine im entsprechenden Verhltnis
gemischte Augabe der RGB- und YRGB-Korrektoren zu bewirken.
Welche Einstellung ist die richtige? Das ist bei diesem rein kreativen Vorgang allein Ihre Entscheidung.
Es gibt kein richtig und falsch, denn es zhlt nur, was Ihnen am besten gefllt!

Synchronisation von Einstellungen


Ist die Kamera an einen ATEM-Mischer gekoppelt, so bermittelt dieser Mischer die Signale zur Steuerung
der Kamera an Ihre Blackmagic Studio Camera. Wenn kameraseitig versehentlich eine Einstellung Ihrer
Studio Camera gendert wird, lst dies ein automatisches Zurcksetzen dieser Einstellung aus, damit die
Synchronisation gewahrt bleibt.

Developer
Information

124 Developer Information


Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct devices
that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to open up our protocols and
we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control messages
embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing
is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are packed
from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as, and can be
assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of
VANC line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of 255
bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a maximum of one
frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame, it should
use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority messages can
be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

125 Developer Information


Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data block.
The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.

Destination device (uint8)


Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual devices
are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate a broadcast
message to all devices.

Command length (uint8)


The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length of
the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of the
header or any trailing padding bytes.

Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message type
being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they do not
understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands that apply to
multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are device specific.

Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set to zero.

Command data (uint8[])


The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format of
the data section is defined by the command itself.

Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes. Any padding
bytes are NOT included in the command length.

Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to determine
which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant or unknown
commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

126 Developer Information


Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration

Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.

Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters
available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters.
Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters that apply to multiple
types of devices.

Data type (uint8)


The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length is
used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message must
contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

127 Developer Information


128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.

Operation type (uint8)


The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified parameter.
Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type. This
operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other value
for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be clamped
according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through 255
are available for device specific purposes..

Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of
elements.

The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

128 Developer Information


Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

0.0

1.0

Interpretation

.0

Focus

fixed16

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

0.0=near, 1.0=far

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))

.3

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

trigger instantaneous auto aperture

.6

Optical image stabilisation

boolean

true=enabled, false=disabled

Video mode

int8

trigger instantaneous autofocus

1
.0

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] = dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k DCI,


6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

129 Developer Information


Group

ID

Audio

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Mic level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.1

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic


level input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6
Output

Parameter

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides


Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

130 Developer Information


Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

Reserved

Interpretation

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

131 Developer Information


Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus


on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on camera 4


(10 ms = 10000 us = 0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01

select 1080p 23.98 mode on all


cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma adjust for 16


green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

76

Hilfe

132 Hilfe
Hilfestellung
Am schnellsten erhalten Sie Hilfe ber die Online-Support-Seiten auf der Blackmagic Design-Website. Sehen
Sie dort nach der aktuellsten Support-Dokumentation fr Ihre Kamera.

Blackmagic Design Online-Support-Seiten


Die aktuellste Version der Bedienungsanleitung, Produktsoftware und Support-Hinweise finden Sie im
Blackmagic Support Center unter www.blackmagicdesign.com/support/de.

Kontaktaufnahme mit Blackmagic Design Support


Wenn unser Support-Material Ihnen nicht die gewnschte Hilfe gibt, gehen Sie bitte auf unsere SupportSeite, klicken Sie dort auf Senden Sie uns eine E-Mail" und schicken Sie uns Ihre Support-Anfrage. Oder
klicken Sie auf Finden Sie Ihr lokales Support-Team" und rufen Sie Ihre nchstgelegene Blackmagic Design
Support-Stelle an.

berprfen der aktuell installierten Softwareversion


Um zu berprfen, welche Version des Blackmagic Camera Utility auf Ihrem Computer installiert ist, ffnen
Sie das Fenster About Blackmagic Camera Utility".
ffnen Sie unter Mac OS X das Blackmagic Camera Utility ber den Ordner Anwendungen".
Whlen Sie im Anwendungsmen About Blackmagic Camera Utility" aus, um die
Versionsnummer nachzusehen.
ffnen Sie unter Windows das Blackmagic Camera Utility ber das Startmen oder den
Standardbildschirm. Klicken Sie auf das Men Hilfe" und whlen Sie About Blackmagic Camera
Utility" aus, um die Versionsnummer nachzusehen.

So erhalten Sie die aktuellsten Software-Updates


Nachdem Sie berprft haben, welche Version des Dienstprogramms Blackmagic Camera Utility auf Ihrem
Computer installiert ist, besuchen Sie zum Auffinden der neuesten Aktualisierungen bitte das Blackmagic
Support Center unter www.blackmagicdesign.com/support/de. Zwar ist es in der Regel empfehlenswert, die
neuesten Updates zu laden, aber dennoch sind Software-Updates mglichst zu vermeiden, wenn Sie sich
inmitten eines wichtigen Projekts befinden.

Austausch des Akkus


Der integrierte Akku kann nicht vom Benutzer repariert werden. Wenn der Akku ausgetauscht werden
muss, mssen Sie die Kamera zu diesem Zweck an ein Blackmagic Design Service-Center in Ihrer Nhe
einschicken. Wenn die Garantiezeit der Kamera abgelaufen ist, wird fr den Austausch des Akkus, Arbeitszeit
und Rcksendung der Kamera eine geringfgige Servicegebhr erhoben. Bitte wenden Sie sich an den
Blackmagic Design Support, um herauszufinden, an welche Adresse die Kamera zu versenden ist, wie Sie sie
sicher verpacken und wie viel der Akkuaustausch in Ihrem Land kostet.

Garantie

133 Garantie
12 Monate eingeschrnkte Garantie
Blackmagic Design gewhrt eine Garantie auf Material- und Verarbeitungsfehler von 12 Monaten ab Kaufdatum.
Wenn sich ein Produkt innerhalb dieser Garantiezeit als fehlerhaft erweist, wird die Firma Blackmagic Design
nach ihrem Ermessen das defekte Produkt entweder ohne Kosten fr Teile und Arbeitszeit reparieren, oder
Sie erhalten im Austausch fr das defekte Produkt einen Ersatz.
Zur Inanspruchnahme der Garantieleistungen mssen Sie als Kunde Blackmagic Design ber den Fehler
innerhalb der Garantiezeit in Kenntnis setzen. Der Kunde ist fr die Verpackung und den bezahlten Versand
des defekten Produkts an ein spezielles von Blackmagic Design benanntes Service Center verantwortlich.
Smtliche Versandkosten, Versicherungen, Zlle, Steuern und sonstige Abgaben im Zusammenhang mit der
Rcksendung von Waren an uns sind vom Kunden zu tragen.
Diese Garantie gilt nicht fr Mngel, Fehler oder Schden, die durch unsachgeme Handhabung oder
unsachgeme oder unzureichende Wartung und Pflege verursacht wurden. Blackmagic Design ist innerhalb
dieser Garantie nicht verpflichtet, die folgenden Serviceleistungen zu erbringen: a) Behebung von Schden
infolge von Versuchen Dritter, die Installation, Reparatur oder Wartung des Produkts vorzunehmen, b)
Behebung von Schden aufgrund von unsachgemer Handhabung oder Anschluss an nicht kompatible
Gerte, c) Behebung von Schden oder Strungen, die durch die Verwendung von nicht Blackmagic-DesignErsatzteilen oder -Verbrauchsmaterialien enstanden sind, d) Service fr ein Produkt, das verndert oder in andere
Produkte integriert wurde, sofern eine solche nderung oder Integration zu einer Erhhung des Zeitaufwands
oder zu Schwierigkeiten bei der Wartung des Produkts fhrt. BER DIE IN DIESER GARANTIEERKLRUNG
AUSDRCKLICH AUFGEFHRTEN ANSPRCHE HINAUS BERNIMMT BLACKMAGIC DESIGN KEINE
WEITEREN GARANTIEN, WEDER AUSDRCKLICH NOCH STILLSCHWEIGEND. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
UND SEINE HNDLER LEHNEN JEGLICHE STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GARANTIEN IN BEZUG AUF AUSSAGEN
ZUR MARKTGNGIGKEIT UND GEBRAUCHSTAUGLICHKEIT FR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK AB. DIE
VERANTWORTUNG VON BLACKMAGIC DESIGN, FEHLERHAFTE PRODUKTE ZU REPARIEREN ODER ZU
ERSETZEN, IST DIE EINZIGE UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHE ABHILFE DIE GEGENBER DEM KUNDEN FR
ALLE INDIREKTEN, SPEZIELLEN, NEBEN- ODER FOLGESCHDEN ZUR VERFGUNG GESTELLT WIRD,
UNABHNGIG DAVON, OB BLACKMAGIC DESIGN ODER DER HNDLER VON DER MGLICHKEIT
SOLCHER SCHDEN ZUVOR IN KENNTNIS GESETZT WURDE. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN IST NICHT HAFTBAR
FR JEGLICHE WIDERRECHTLICHE VERWENDUNG DER GERTE DURCH DEN KUNDEN. BLACKMAGIC
HAFTET NICHT FR SCHDEN, DIE SICH AUS DER VERWENDUNG DES PRODUKTS ERGEBEN. NUTZUNG
DES PRODUKTS AUF EIGENE GEFAHR.
Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Blackmagic Design', 'DeckLink', 'HDLink', 'Workgroup Videohub',
'Multibridge Pro', 'Multibridge Extreme', 'Intensity' und 'Leading the creative video revolution sind eingetragene Markennamen in den
USA und in anderen Lndern. Alle anderen Unternehmens- und Produktnamen sind mglicherweise Warenzeichen der jeweiligen Firmen,
mit denen sie verbunden sind.

Manual de instalacin y funcionamiento

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X
Windows

Espaol

octubre de 2014

Bienvenido
Gracias por haber adquirido una Studio Camera de Blackmagic!
Estamos muy contentos de haber diseado esta nueva cmara. Desde
adolescente, siempre tuve pasin por las producciones en directo. Son tan
emocionantes! Las cmaras con intercomunicadores y sistemas de sealizacin
siempre han sido sumamente costosas y difciles de manejar debido a su gran
tamao. Quisimos solucionar este problema desarrollando un producto ms
compacto con los controles y prestaciones de las grandes cmaras.
Por eso diseamos la Studio Camera. Queramos una cmara ms pequea
que brindara una mayor portabilidad, pero las cmaras de menor tamao
tienen pantallas diminutas. Esto no era lo que tenamos en mente. Nuestra
idea era ofrecer un visor mucho ms grande! Entonces desarrollamos la Studio
Camera. Se trata de la cmara profesional ms pequea del mercado y cuenta
con un visor enorme que es fantstico. Gracias a su tamao, resulta sumamente
fcil enfocar y ajustar la imagen con precisin.
Asimismo, cuenta con luces piloto, intercomunicador, batera integrada y por
supuesto una montura Micro 4/3 flexible. Es todo lo que necesitas en una
solucin completa. Puedes conectar micrfonos ms grandes con proteccin
de viento y alimentacin fantasma, o utilizar la cmara a kilmetros de distancia
de tu mezclador gracias a las conexiones de fibra ptica. Incluso puedes hacer
uso de la cmara para todo tipo de producciones en general conectndola
a un HyperDeck Shuttle.
Esperamos que la aproveches al mximo la Studio Camera durante tus
producciones en directo y te permita realizar proyectos increbles.
Estamos muy entusiasmados por ver plasmada toda tu creatividad!

Grant Petty
Director Ejecutivo de Blackmagic Design

Indice

Blackmagic Studio Camera

137 
Primeros pasos

151 
Uso del programa de control

Introduccin137

Control de la cmara 151

Montaje del objetivo 139

Uso del mdulo de control 152

Encendido de la cmara 139

Herramientas de DaVinci Resolve para correcciones


primarias154

140 
Conexiones
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Lado izquierdo 140
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Lado derecho 141

142 
Ajustes de la Studio Camera

Sincronizacin de ajustes  156

157 
Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol 157
Overview157

Ajustes de la cmara 142

Assumptions157

Ajustes de audio 143

Blanking Encoding 157

Ajustes de monitorizacin 144

Message Grouping 157

Ajustes de estudio 145


Modificacin de los ajustes 146
Ajustes adicionales 147

148 
Salida de vdeo de la cmara
Conexin a mezcladores 148
Conexin a grabadores 148

149 
Programa utilitario de la cmara
150 
Accesorios
Parasol150
Otros accesorios 150

165 
Ayuda
166 
Garanta

Primeros pasos

137 Primeros pasos


Introduccin

Caractersticas
1. LUZ PILOTO FRONTAL
Indica a la persona frente a las cmaras cul de ellas est transmitiendo. Ver pgina 144.
2. CONEXIN LANC
Conexin estreo de 2,5 mm para controlar el enfoque y la apertura del diafragma a distancia. Ver pgina 140.
3. AURICULARES PROFESIONALES
Conector TRS de 0,25 para monitorizar el audio mediante auriculares profesionales. Ver pgina 140.
4. ENTRADA PARA EL MICRFONO DE LOS AURICULARES
Conector TRS de 0,206 pulgadas para comunicarse con la sala de control mediante auriculares profesionales.
Ver pgina 140.
5. ENTRADAS DE AUDIO
Dos conectores XLR de 0,25 para seales balanceadas. Ver pgina 140.
2

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

6. ENTRADA/SALIDA PTICA
Entrada y salida para fibra ptica. Permite utilizar longitudes de cable de hasta 45 km. Ver pgina 141.

7
8
9

REF

7. SALIDA SDI
Salida SDI para conectar mezcladores y otros dispositivos. Ver pgina 141.

PUSH

12V

10

8. ENTRADA SDI
Permite al camargrafo ver la salida de programa (PGM). Ver pgina 141.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

9. ENTRADA DE REFERENCIA
Permite sincronizar varias cmaras segn una seal de referencia (BB o Tri-level). Ver pgina 141.
10. ALIMENTACIN
Entrada para fuente de alimentacin (12-24 V) y carga de la batera. Ver pgina 141.

PUSH

138 Primeros pasos


PUSH

11

11. PANTALLA LCD


Permite monitorizar las imgenes transmitidas desde la cmara y la salida de programa o ver el men.
Ver pgina 144.

12

12. LUZ PILOTO TRASERA


Al encenderse indica al camargrafo que su cmara est transmitiendo en directo.
13. BOTN DE ENFOQUE
Presione una vez para enfocar automticamente o dos veces para ver el indicador de enfoque en pantalla.
Ver pgina 146.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

14. BOTN DE CONTROL DEL DIAFRAGMA


Presione una vez para ajustar la exposicin automticamente. Ver pgina 146.
22

15. BOTN PTT


Mantenga este botn presionado para comunicarse. Presione el botn dos veces rpidamente para activar
el modo manos libres. Presinelo nuevamente para volver al modo normal. Ver pgina 147.
16. BOTN PGM
Presione para alternar entre las imgenes de la cmara en directo y la salida de programa del mezclador en
la sala de control. Ver pgina 147.

23

17. BOTN LUT


No disponible por el momento.
18. BOTONES DE NAVEGACIN
Permiten desplazarse por el men en pantalla. Ver pgina 147.
19. BOTN SET
Utilice este botn para confirmar las opciones seleccionadas. Ver pgina 147.
20. BOTN DISPLAY
Presione para mostrar u ocultar informacin en la pantalla. Ver pgina 147.
21. BOTN MENU
Permite acceder al men en pantalla. Ver pgina 147.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

22. BOTN DE ENCENDIDO


Presione este botn para encender la cmara. Mantngalo presionado para apagarla. Ver pginas 139 y 147.

SDI IN

23. CONEXIN USB


Puerto mini USB tipo B para actualizar el software interno de la cmara. Ver pgina 149.

REF

12V

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

139 Primeros pasos


Montaje del objetivo
Para comenzar a utilizar la cmara, basta con colocar un objetivo y encenderla. Para quitar la tapa protectora
de la montura, mantenga presionado el botn de bloqueo y gire la tapa hacia la izquierda para aflojarla.
Recomendamos siempre apagar la cmara antes de colocar o retirar un objetivo.
Para colocar el objetivo:
2

PUSH

Paso 1. El punto en el objetivo debe estar alineado con el punto en la montura de la cmara. Muchos
objetivos tienen un punto azul, rojo o blanco, o algn otro indicador.

PUSH

Paso 2. Gire el objetivo hacia la derecha hasta que calce en su lugar.


Paso 3. Para quitar el objetivo, mantenga presionado el botn de bloqueo, gire el objetivo hacia la izquierda
hasta aflojarlo y retrelo con cuidado.
Cuando no hay ningn objetivo montado en la cmara, el sensor queda expuesto al polvo y a otros residuos,
por lo cual es preferible mantenerlo cubierto con la tapa protectora si es posible.
2

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Montaje y extraccin del objetivo.


SDI IN

12V

OPTICAL OUT

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

Use el adaptador suministrado para la alimentacin de la


cmara y la carga de la batera.

La cmara dispone de una batera interna que puede cargarse mediante el adaptador suministrado. Puede
alternar entre distintos modos de alimentacin sin interrupciones, por lo cual es posible cargar la batera
mientras est en funcionamiento.
Paso 1. Presione el botn de encendido situado debajo de la pantalla. La pantalla se encender y mostrar
la imagen.

REF

OPTICAL IN

Encendido de la cmara

Paso 2. Mantenga presionado el botn de encendido para apagar la cmara.

Conexiones

140 Conexiones
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Lado izquierdo
Conexin LANC
Permite ajustar el enfoque, acercar o alejar la imagen y modificar la apertura del diafragma a distancia en
objetivos compatibles. Consta de un conector hembra estreo de 2.5 mm que utiliza el protocolo LANC
estndar.
Mediante un controlador LANC es posible manipular el servomotor en objetivos activos con montura tipo
Micro 4/3. Actualmente, la cmara es compatible con los siguientes objetivos:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42 mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S.
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175 mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S.
Olympus 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M. Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3

Salida para auriculares


Permite monitorizar el audio mediante auriculares profesionales con conectores fijos. Los distintos modelos
abarcan desde auriculares con audfonos individuales para uso en estudios hasta aquellos de mayor tamao
con supresin de ruido, ms apropiados para conciertos o espectculos deportivos. El audio se integra a
los canales 15 y 16 de la seal de fibra ptica o SDI entrante. Es muy raro que estos canales se usen en una
produccin, de modo que estn disponibles para el audio del intercomunicador.

Entrada para el micrfono de los auriculares


1

PUSH

Permite comunicarse con la sala de control mediante auriculares profesionales. El audio se integra a los canales
15 y 16 de la seal de fibra ptica o SDI transmitida a la sala de control.

Entradas de audio
3
2

PUSH

Las conexiones XLR admiten dos canales de audio analgico balanceado profesional. El volumen de entrada
para cada canal se puede ajustar en el men de audio. Las entradas admiten seales de audio a nivel de
lnea o micrfono. El tipo de entrada se selecciona desde el mismo men. El audio se integra a los canales
1 y 2 de la seal SDI.

141 Conexiones
Blackmagic Studio Camera - Lado derecho
Entrada/Salida ptica
La entrada y salida de fibra ptica dispone de conectores LC convencionales y admite seales 3G-SDI
(Studio Camera HD) y 6G-SDI (Studio Camera 4K). Existe una gran variedad de cables de fibra ptica disponibles
en el mercado porque son los mismos que se utilizan en las redes informticas. Las conexiones de fibra ptica
hacen posible usar cables con una extensin de hasta 45 km, lo cual es suficiente aun para las transmisiones
desde exteriores ms exigentes. Cuando se utilizan las entradas para fibra ptica y SDI simultneamente,
la seal del dispositivo conectado en primer lugar tiene prioridad.

Salida SDI
Utilice la salida SDI para transmitir seales en formato 4:2:2 a 10 bits a dispositivos de vdeo SDI profesionales
tales como conmutadores, tarjetas de captura y mezcladores. La Studio Camera HD es compatible con seales
3G-SDI, mientras que la Studio Camera 4K permite transmitir seales 12G-SDI.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Entrada SDI
Esta entrada permite al camargrafo ver las imgenes de la salida de programa (PGM). Simplemente presione
PGM para ver las imgenes de la cmara en directo o la salida de programa del mezclador en la sala de
control. Al utilizar las entradas para fibra ptica y SDI simultneamente, la seal del dispositivo conectado
en primer lugar tendr prioridad. Si se utiliza la Studio Camera para grabar imgenes en un dispositivo tal
como el Hyperdeck Shuttle de Blackmagic, la salida de este ltimo puede conectarse a la entrada SDI para
reproducir el material grabado.

Entrada de referencia

REF

Esta entrada permite sincronizar varias cmaras segn una seal de referencia (Black Burst o Tri-level).
La sincronizacin de las cmaras con una seal de referencia externa ayuda a prevenir errores de coordinacin
que podran dar como resultado saltos en la imagen al cambiar de una cmara a otra.
12V

Alimentacin
La entrada de 12 24 V permite conectar la fuente de alimentacin y cargar la batera interna. La Studio
Camera HD y la Studio Camera 4K tienen una autonoma de 4 y 3 horas respectivamente con la batera
completamente cargada.

Ajustes de la Studio
Camera

142 Ajustes de la Studio Camera


Ajustes de la cmara
Para modificar los ajustes de la cmara, presione el botn MENU.
Utilice los botones de navegacin para resaltar mens y el botn SET para confirmar los parmetros seleccionados.

Formato de vdeo
Seleccione el formato de vdeo que desea utilizar. Sobre el margen izquierdo de la pgina encontrar una
lista de formatos compatibles.

Ganancia
Estos parmetros son de utilidad al rodar en condiciones de poca luz. El valor preestablecido es 0dB y este
puede aumentarse en incrementos de 6dB hasta un mximo de 18dB.

Balance de blancos
La cmara incluye seis valores preestablecidos para diferentes temperaturas de color.
3200K para luz de tungsteno
4500K para luz fluorescente
5000K, 5600K, 6500K y 7500K para una distintas condiciones de luz diurna, dependiendo de la
hora del da.

Ajustes de la cmara

Formatos de vdeo compatibles

Velocidad del obturador

Studio Camera HD
and Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

La velocidad del obturador complementa el valor ISO controlando la cantidad de luz en el sensor. Existen 15
velocidades disponibles, desde 1/50 seg. hasta 1/2000 seg.

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

Rango dinmico

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

Film
El modo Film en la Studio Camera HD usa una curva gamma logartmica para maximizar la informacin en
la seal de vdeo. Esto permite aprovechar las ventajas que ofrecen los programas de etalonaje digital tales
como DaVinci Resolve.

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

Video
El modo Video en la Studio Camera HD y la Studio Camera 4K usa el estndar REC709 para seales de
vdeo de alta definicin. Este estndar es compatible con los equipos ms modernos.

Idioma
El idioma preestablecido es ingls. Prximamente se podrn seleccionar otros idiomas tales como espaol,
francs, alemn, ruso, japons, chino y coreano.

143 Ajustes de la Studio Camera


Ajustes de audio
Para modificar los ajustes de audio en la cmara, presione el botn MENU y seleccione el cono del micrfono
ubicado a la izquierda de la pantalla.

Entrada de audio
Permite utilizar el audio del micrfono interno de la cmara o de las conexiones XLR.

Volumen del micrfono


Permite ajustar el volumen de grabacin del micrfono integrado. Mueva el control deslizante hacia la derecha
o la izquierda para aumentar o disminuir el valor. La cmara cuenta con un micrfono estreo. El micrfono
integrado graba el sonido en los canales de audio 1 y 2 cuando no se detecta una fuente de audio externa.

Volumen de entrada
Las conexiones de audio externas admiten seales a nivel de lnea o micrfono. Seleccione Line al conectar
equipos de audio externos tales como mezcladores o amplificadores. Seleccione Mic Low o Mic High
dependiendo de la fuerza de la seal del micrfono. Es importante seleccionar el volumen apropiado para
asegurarse de que el audio externo pueda oirse o evitar que suene muy alto y distorsionado.
Ajuste el volumen del audio externo mediante las flechas.
Ajustes de audio

Entrada Ch 1
Mueva el control deslizante hacia la derecha o la izquierda para aumentar o disminuir el volumen del canal 1.
La seal de audio externa anula el micrfono de la cmara y se transmite a travs del canal 1.

Entrada Ch 2
Mueva el control deslizante hacia la derecha o la izquierda para aumentar o disminuir los niveles del canal 2.
La seal de audio externa anula el micrfono de la cmara y se transmite a travs del canal 2.

Alimentacin fantasma
Habilite o desactive la alimentacin fantasma para ambas entradas XLR externas seleccionando On /
Off mediante las flechas en el men Audio. La alimentacin fantasma es un mtodo para proporcionar
corriente mediante los cables del micrfono a los dispositivos de audio que la necesitan, como por ejemplo un
micrfono de condensador. Asegrese de esperar al menos 10 segundos luego de desconectar el micrfono
para que la alimentacin sea nula antes de conectar un micrfono independiente. Los micrfonos de cinta
no son compatibles con est forma de alimentacin.
No es posible activar la alimentacin fantasma al seleccionar la opcin Line.

144 Ajustes de la Studio Camera


Ajustes de monitorizacin
Para modificar los ajustes de la pantalla, presione el botn MENU y seleccione el cono del monitor.

Brillo
Mueva el control deslizante hacia la izquierda o la derecha para ajustar el brillo de la pantalla. El valor
preestablecido es 60%.

Funcin Zebra
Las cmaras de Blackmagic cuentan con una funcin denominada "Zebra" que indica los niveles de exposicin.
Aparecern lneas diagonales en cualquier parte de la imagen que supere el valor determinado mediante
dicha funcin.
Active la funcin Zebra y seleccione el nivel de advertencia utilizando las flechas. El nivel preestablecido
es medio.

Indicador de enfoque
Permite cambiar el nivel del indicador de enfoque (focus peaking). Las opciones son desactivado, bajo, medio
y alto. Modifique este parmetro al utilizar un objetivo de gran nitidez para disminuir la cantidad de puntos
en la imagen. El nivel preestablecido es medio.
Ajustes de monitorizacin

Brillo de la luz piloto


Permite ajustar el brillo de la luz piloto frontal. Las opciones son bajo, medio y alto. El nivel preestablecido
es medio.

145 Ajustes de la Studio Camera


Ajustes de estudio
Para modificar los ajustes de la pantalla, presione el botn MENU y seleccione el cono de los auriculares.

Nmero de cmara
Para que la Studio Camera puede utilizar el sistema de sealizacin en forma conjunta con el mezclador,
es preciso identificarla con un nmero. De este modo, el mezclador enviar la seal a la cmara correcta.
La cmara puede identificarse con cualquier nmero entre 1 y 99. El nmero preestablecido es 1.

Fuente de referencia
Se utiliza para seleccionar la fuente de sincronizacin. La cmara puede sincronizarse con la seal de programa
recibida a travs de la entrada SDI o con una fuente externa. Cuando se utiliza una fuente externa, tenga en
cuenta que podra ocurrir una falla en la imagen al realizar la sincronizacin con la cmara.

Tiempo de referencia
Permite ajustar manualmente el tiempo de referencia segn lneas o pxeles.

Volumen del auricular


Ajustes de estudio

Mueva el control deslizante hacia la derecha o la izquierda para aumentar o disminuir el volumen de
monitorizacin del audio. El valor preestablecido es 50%.

Volumen del micrfono del auricular


Mueva el control deslizante hacia la derecha o la izquierda para aumentar o disminuir el volumen de entrada
al micrfono. El valor preestablecido es 50%.

Mezcla de audio
Permite cambiar el balance entre el sonido de la cmara y el del intercomunicador. La seal de audio se
transmitir por los auriculares segn el modo de visualizacin activo. Por ejemplo, al filmar se escuchar
el audio de la cmara. Al reproducir las imgenes transmitidas al aire se escuchar el audio de la salida de
programa. El valor preestablecido es 0%.

146 Ajustes de la Studio Camera


Modificacin de los ajustes
La Studio Camera permite controlar el objetivo en forma electrnica, lo cual hace posible modificar ciertos
ajustes tales como la apertura y el enfoque automtico. El indicador de enfoque genera un borde verde
alrededor de las partes ms ntidas de la imagen para poder enfocar correctamente con facilidad. Es visible
solamente en la pantalla LCD y no afecta las imgenes transmitidas mediante la salida SDI.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

Botn FOCUS

MENU

Al utilizar la cmara con un objetivo de enfoque automtico, presione el botn FOCUS para activar el indicador
de enfoque o la funcin de enfoque automtico. Presione el botn FOCUS una vez para enfocar en forma
automtica. Presione el botn FOCUS dos veces para activar el indicador de enfoque.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Cuando utilice un objetivo manual, presione el botn FOCUS una vez para activar el indicador de enfoque.
Presione el botn FOCUS una vez para enfocar en forma
automtica. Presione el botn FOCUS dos veces para activar
el indicador de enfoque.

Botn IRIS
Al utilizar el rango dinmico en el modo Video, presione este botn una vez para establecer una exposicin
promedio a partir de las luces y sombras de la toma. Al utilizar el rango dinmico en el modo Film, presione
este botn para ajustar la exposicin segn las partes ms brillantes de la imagen.
Para ajustar la apertura manualmente, presione los botones con las flechas hacia arriba y abajo en el
panel posterior.

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Presione el botn IRIS para utilizar la funcin de exposicin


automtica o utilice las flechas hacia arriba y abajo para
ajustarla en forma manual.

DISPLAY

MENU

147 Ajustes de la Studio Camera


Ajustes adicionales
Push to Talk (PTT)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

Al llevar a cabo una produccin en directo, es de suma importancia que los camargrafos puedan comunicarse
con el director y con los dems integrantes del equipo en la sala de control. Simplemente presione este botn
y mantngalo presionado
mientras
habla. Presione el botn dos veces rpidamente para activar el modo
DISPLAY
MENU
manos libres. Presinelo nuevamente para volver al modo normal.

Programa (PGM)
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

La Studio Camera incluye funciones tales como PTT y PGM


que son esenciales para cualquier produccin en directo.

A veces es importante que el camargrafo pueda ver la salida de programa y no solo las imgenes captadas
por su cmara. Presione este botn para ver las imgenes de la cmara en directo o la seal principal
del mezclador en la sala de control. La fuente de vdeo externa se puede conectar a la entrada SDI o de fibra
ptica.

Tabla de consulta (LUT)


No disponible por el momento.

Flechas
Utilice estos botones para desplazarse por los distintos mens.

Set
Utilice este botn para confirmar las opciones seleccionadas.

Display
Permite mostrar u ocultar las guas de encuadre y el indicador de carga de la batera en la pantalla. Estos
elementos no son visibles en la seal SDI saliente.

Menu
Presione este botn para acceder al Men y luego utilice las flechas para desplazarse por las distintas opciones.

Power
Presione este botn para encender la cmara. Mantngalo presionado para apagarla.

Salida de vdeo de la
cmara

148 Salida de vdeo de la cmara


Conexin a mezcladores
Las Studio Cameras transmiten imgenes en formato 4:2:2 a 10 bits, de modo que es posible conectarlas a
mezcladores y otros equipos SDI. Como disponen de una entrada y salida de fibra ptica no es necesario
utilizar ATEM Camera Converters.
Las imgenes transmitidas a travs de la salida de programa del mezclador se pueden ver en la pantalla de
la cmara conectando dicha salida a la entrada de fibra ptica o SDI de la cmara.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Conexin a grabadores

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Conecte cables de fibra ptica o SDI de la cmara a un


mezclador para producciones en directo u otro dispositivo.
REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

12V

SDI OUT

Conecte la salida SDI de la cmara a la entrada SDI del


Hyperdeck y la salida SDI de ste a la entrada SDI de la
cmara para ver las imgenes grabadas por el dispositivo en
la pantalla de la misma.

Si simplemente desea grabar las imgenes captadas por la cmara, puede conectarla a una unidad SSD tal
como el Hyperdeck Shuttle de Blackmagic mediante las conexiones SDI. De este modo, tambin es posible
ver las imgenes grabadas por el dispositivo en la pantalla de la cmara.

Programa utilitario de la
cmara

PUSH

149 Programa utilitario de la cmara


PUSH

Cmo actualizar el software de la cmara en sistemas operativos Mac OS X


Luego de bajar el programa Blackmagic Camera Utility y descomprimir el archivo descargado, abra la imagen
de disco correspondiente para ver sus contenidos.
Ejecute la aplicacin Blackmagic Camera Installer y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla.

Cmo actualizar el software de la cmara en sistemas operativos Windows


Luego de bajar el programa Blackmagic Camera Utility y descomprimir el archivo descargado, ver una carpeta
denominada de la misma forma que contiene este manual en formato PDF y el instalador.
Haga clic dos veces sobre este ltimo y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla para completar la
instalacin.

Cmo actualizar el software interno de la cmara


Luego de instalar la ltima versin del programa utilitario de la cmara en el ordenador, conctelo a la cmara
mediante un cable USB. El puerto mini USB 2.0 se encuentra en la parte inferior de la cmara.

Programa utilitario de la cmara

Ejecute el programa Blackmagic Camera Utility y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla para
actualizar el software de la cmara.

El puerto mini USB 2.0 se encuentra en la parte inferior de


la cmara.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Accesorios

150 Accesorios
Parasol
La Studio Camera incluye un parasol plegable para dar sombra a la pantalla en condiciones de mucho brillo
y asegurar una visualizacin ptima en todo momento.
Paso 1. Ubique las seis tuercas de mariposa incluidas en la cmara.
Paso 2. Haga coincidir los agujeros del parasol con los puntos de montura de la cmara y coloque dos
tuercas en la parte superior y en cada costado de la misma para sujetar el parasol.

Otros accesorios
Para boletines de noticias, quizs sea conveniente colocar la cmara sobre un pedestal y aadirle rieles para
objetivos de gran tamao y apuntadores electrnicos. En el caso de transmisiones desde exteriores, podra
ser necesario agregar micrfonos, bateras externas o mandos a distancia. La cmara incluye dos agujeros con
rosca de 3/8 en la parte inferior y diez de 1/4 en la parte superior y los costados de la misma. De esta manera,
ofrece la flexibilidad necesaria para adaptarla y utilizar diferentes accesorios segn el tipo deproduccin.

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

Uso del programa de control

151 Uso del programa de control


Control de la cmara
La Studio Camera puede manejarse desde un mezclador ATEM mediante el mdulo de control incluido en
el programa ATEM Software Control. Se puede acceder al mismo haciendo clic en el botn de la cmara y
permite ajustar con facilidad diferentes parmetros tales como la apertura del diafragma, la ganancia y el
enfoque al utilizar objetivos compatibles, adems de balancear las cmaras y crear imgenes sorprendentes
con las funciones de correccin primaria de DaVinci Resolve.
El mdulo de control enva paquetes de instrucciones a la cmara mediante cualquiera de las salidas SDI
del mezclador, excepto aquellas correspondientes a seales subconvertidas. Al conectar una salida SDI del
dispositivo a la entrada de vdeo de la cmara, esta detecta los paquetes de instrucciones en la seal permitiendo
controlar los diferentes parmetros. La cmara se controla mediante conexiones SDI normales o de fibra ptica.

Conexin SDI

ATEM Camera Control


PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

Paso 2. Conecte cualquiera de las salidas SDI del mezclador (excepto aquellas utilizadas para el modo de
visualizacin mltiple o seales subconvertidas) a la entrada SDI de la Studio Camera. No es posible
transmitir la seal de control de la cmara a travs de las salidas mencionadas en la excepcin anterior.

REMOTE

LOCK TO TALK
IN
2

HDMI IN

REMOTE

STEREO IN

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

Paso 1. Conecte la salida SDI de la cmara cualquier entrada SDI del mezclador.

PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

HD

HD

PUSH

STEREO
IN
PUSH

SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

IN
1

USB 2.0

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

HD

PREVIEW

HD

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

CH 1

CH 2

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

HD

Paso 3. Presione el botn MENU en la cmara. Seleccione Studio Settings y luego modifique el campo
Camera Number de forma que coincida con la entrada del mezclador. Por ejemplo, si Studio Camera
1 corresponde a Cam 1 en el mezclador, el campo Camera Number tambin debe ser 1. De este
modo es posible asegurarse de que se ha establecido la comunicacin con la cmara correcta.
CH 1

SDI INPUTS

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

CH 1CH 1

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

HD

MULTI-VIEW

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

Conexin mediante fibra ptica

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Conecte la Studio Camera a cualquiera


de las entradas SDI del mezclador.

Paso 1. Conecte la Studio Camera a un ATEM Studio Converter mediante las conexiones de fibra ptica
en ambos dispositivos.
Paso 2. Conecte una salida SDI disponible del ATEM Studio Converter a cualquier entrada SDI del mezclador.

3
L

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT
PRESS TO TALK

OUT

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

PUSH

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

IN

PGM SDI

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

SDI OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Conecte varias cmaras mediante las conexiones de fibra


ptica utilizando un ATEM Studio Converter.

IN

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

4
Paso 3.
Conecte cualquiera de las salidas SDI del mezclador (excepto aquellas utilizadas para el modo
de visualizacin mltiple o seales subconvertidas) a la entrada SDI del ATEM Studio Converter.
No es posible transmitir la seal de control de la cmara a travs de las salidas mencionadas en la
excepcin anterior.
SDI OUT

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

OPTICAL OUT/IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Paso 4. Presione el botn MENU en la cmara. Seleccione Studio Settings y luego modifique el campo
Camera Number de forma que coincida con la entrada del mezclador. Por ejemplo, si Studio Camera
1 corresponde a Cam 1 en el mezclador, el campo Camera Number tambin debe ser 1. De este
modo es posible asegurarse de que se ha establecido la comunicacin con la cmara correcta.
Compruebe la asignacin de los botones del mezclador en las preferencias del programa ATEM Software Control
para asegurarse de que hayan sido vinculados a la cmara correcta. Al establecer una conexin entre ambos
dispositivos, el usuario tambin dispondr de indicadores en la cmara que muestran si est al aire y podr ver la
seal correspondiente a la salida de programa del mezclador en la pantalla de la misma presionando el botn PGM.

152 Uso del programa de control


Uso del mdulo de control

Haga clic en el cono de ajustes para seleccionar la salida


auxiliar que utilizar el mdulo de control.

Ejecute el programa ATEM Software Control y haga clic en el botn de la cmara situado en la parte inferior
de la ventana. Ver una serie de controladores con herramientas para ajustar y mejorar la imagen de cada
cmara. Los controladores son fciles de usar. Simplemente haga clic en los botones o mantenga presionado
el botn del ratn y muvalo para ajustar la imagen.

Seleccin de cmaras
La fila de botones situada en la parte superior de la ventana permite seleccionar la cmara que el usuario
desea controlar. En la ventana de ajuste del color, tambin se pueden utilizar estos botones para seleccionar
una cmara. Cuando se emplea una salida auxiliar para la monitorizacin, la seal de la cmara seleccionada
tambin se transmitir a dicha salida segn las preferencias establecidas en el mezclador.

Estado de la cmara
En la parte superior de cada controlador se identifica la cmara y se indica si la misma est al aire. Adems
hay un botn de bloqueo. Al hacer clic sobre este se bloquean todos los controles de la cmara. Cuando la
cmara est al aire, la barra superior de la ventana se enciende en rojo e indica On Air.

Crculo cromtico
En la parte superior de cada controlador se identifica la
cmara y se indica si la misma est al aire. Adems, hay un
botn de bloqueo. Utilice los controles generales debajo
de cada crculo cromtico para ajustar las sombras, tonos
intermedios y luces en cada canal YRGB.

El crculo cromtico es una herramienta til de DaVinci Resolve que permite ajustar el color en las luces, tonos
intermedios y sombras de cada canal YRGB. Para seleccionar el parmetro que desea modificar, haga clic en
uno de los tres botones situados arriba del crculo cromtico.

Control general
El control general situado debajo del crculo cromtico permite ajustar el contraste en todos los canales
YRGB al mismo tiempo o la luminancia de las luces, tonos intermedios y sombras en forma independiente.

Botn de reajuste
Los botones situados en la parte superior derecha de cada controlador permiten seleccionar fcilmente los
parmetros de etalonaje que se desean copiar, aplicar o restablecer. A su vez, cada crculo cromtico tambin
cuenta con un botn de reajuste. Haga clic sobre el mismo para copiar, aplicar o restablecer los parmetros a
los valores predeterminados. Cabe destacar que los ajustes de los controladores bloqueados no se modifican
al copiar y aplicar otros parmetros.

Al modificar parmetros en todas las cmaras


simultneamente, el sistema solicita una confirmacin
previa por parte del usuario. De esta forma, es posible evitar
cambios en las cmaras no bloqueadas cuya seal est al aire.

El botn de reajuste general situado en la esquina superior derecha de la ventana de etalonaje permite
restablecer los valores predeterminados del crculo cromtico y los ajustes de contraste, saturacin, matiz y
luminancia. Es posible aplicar parmetros de etalonaje a todas las cmaras en general o a cada una en forma
individual para lograr una apariencia uniforme en las imgenes. Los valores correspondientes a la apertura
del diafragma, el enfoque, el control primario y el pedestal no se alteran al copiar y aplicar otros ajustes. Al
modificar parmetros en todas las cmaras simultneamente, el sistema solicita una confirmacin previa por
parte del usuario. De esta forma, es posible evitar cambios en las cmaras no bloqueadas cuya seal est al aire.

153 Uso del programa de control


Control del diafragma/pedestal
Este control se encuentra en el retculo central de cada controlador y se enciende en rojo cuando la cmara
est al aire.
Para abrir o cerrar el diafragma, arrastre el crculo hacia arriba o abajo. Al mantener presionada la tecla de
maysculas mientras se mueve el crculo solo se modifica la apertura del diafragma.
Para oscurecer o incrementar el pedestal, arrastre el crculo hacia la izquierda o derecha. Al mantener presionada
la tecla Command (Mac) o Control (Windows) mientras se mueve el crculo solo se modifica el pedestal.

Control primario
Este control se encuentra a la izquierda del control del diafragma/pedestal y permite limitar la apertura
mxima del diafragma. Es til para evitar que salgan al aire imgenes sobreexpuestas.
Para limitar la apertura del diafragma, bralo completamente usando el control circular y luego utilice el
control primario para ajustar la exposicin. De esta forma, al modificar la apertura del diafragma, dicho umbral
impedir que se exceda el lmite mximo de exposicin.

Indicador del diafragma


El indicador del diafragma se encuentra a la derecha del control circular y brinda una rpida referencia visual
de la apertura de la lente. Esta indicacin depende del ajuste del control primario.

Botn de enfoque automtico


El control del diafragma/pedestal se enciende en rojo cuando
la cmara correspondiente est al aire.

El botn de enfoque automtico se encuentra en la esquina inferior izquierda del controlador. Presinelo para
ajustar el enfoque en forma automtica si cuenta con un objetivo activo que permita modificar el enfoque
electrnicamente. Cabe destacar que aunque la mayora de los objetivos son compatibles con esta funcin,
algunos tambin disponen de un modo de ajuste manual, por lo cual es importante asegurarse de seleccionar
el modo automtico. En algunos casos, el modo se selecciona deslizando el anillo de enfoque en el objetivo
hacia adelante o atrs.

Enfoque manual
Para modificar el enfoque de la cmara en forma manual, utilice el ajuste situado en la parte inferior de cada
controlador. Deslice la rueda hacia la izquierda o derecha para ajustar el enfoque manualmente al mirar la
seal de vdeo de la cmara de forma de obtener imgenes claras y ntidas.

Para enfocar con un objetivo compatible, haga clic sobre el


botn de enfoque automtico o deslice el control de enfoque
hacia la derecha o izquierda.

154 Uso del programa de control


Ganancia de la cmara
Este control permite aumentar la ganancia de la cmara. Es de suma importancia al filmar en condiciones de
luz escasa para evitar que las imgenes queden subexpuestas. Para aumentar o disminuir la ganancia, haga
clic sobre las flechas correspondientes.
La ganancia se puede aumentar siempre que sea necesario, por ejemplo al rodar en exteriores cuando
la intensidad de la luz disminuye al atardecer y es preciso aumentar el brillo de la imagen. Ntese que al
incrementar la ganancia tambin aumentar el ruido en las imgenes.

Control de la velocidad de obturacin


Las flechas para ajustar la ganancia, la velocidad de
obturacin y el balance de blancos aparecen al colocar el
puntero del ratn sobre el indicador correspondiente.

Este control se encuentra entre el crculo cromtico y el control del diafragma/pedestal. Para aumentar o
disminuir la velocidad del obturador, coloque el puntero del ratn sobre el indicador de velocidad y luego
haga clic sobre las flechas correspondientes.
Si la imagen parpadea, disminuya la velocidad de obturacin para resolver el problema. Una buena forma de
obtener ms brillo en las imgenes sin modificar la ganancia es disminuyendo la velocidad de obturacin, ya
que de este modo se incrementa el tiempo de exposicin del sensor. Al aumentar la velocidad de obturacin
se reduce el rastro dejado por los objetos en movimiento, por lo cual tambin puede usarse para lograr una
mayor nitidez en las tomas de accin.

Balance de blancos
Est situado junto al control de la velocidad de obturacin y puede modificarse haciendo clic en las flechas
ubicadas a ambos lados del indicador de la temperatura del color. Permite compensar los colores clidos
o fros emitidos por diferentes fuentes de luz. De este modo, es posible conservar la pureza de los blancos
en la imagen.

Herramientas de DaVinci Resolve para correcciones primarias


La ventana del mdulo de control de la cmara puede convertirse en una interfaz similar a la que contiene
las herramientas de correccin primaria en un programa de edicin.

Para acceder a las herramientas de correccin primaria de


DaVinci Resolve, haga clic sobre el botn situado en la parte
inferior a la derecha del crculo cromtico.

Estas funciones de etalonaje estn integradas en la cmara. Las herramientas son idnticas a las utilizadas
en DaVinci Resolve, de modo que si el usuario est familiarizado con ellas podr valerse de su experiencia
en materia de correccin del color durante las producciones en directo.
Se puede expandir el panel de correccin desde el controlador de la cmara para acceder a la interfaz
completa con ajustes adicionales.
Esta dispone de crculos cromticos y otros controles que permiten ver las luces, tonos intermedios y sombras
al mismo tiempo. Para cambiar de cmara, utilice los botones en la parte superior de la ventana.

155 Uso del programa de control


Crculos cromticos
Los controles Lift, Gamma y Gain permiten realizar ajustes interdependientes pero a su vez especficos
para ciertas tonalidades. En trminos fotogrficos, dichos controles corresponden a las sombras, tonos
intermedios y luces respectivamente.
Para realizar ajustes drsticos o sutiles, utilice los crculos cromticos de las siguientes maneras:

Crculos cromticos para las luces, tonos intermedios y


sombras en el corrector de color.

Haga clic dentro del crculo y arrastre el ratn: Ntese que no es necesario arrastrar el indicador
de balance de color. A medida que este se desplaza, los valores RGB debajo del crculo cambian
reflejando los ajustes realizados en cada canal.

Mantenga presionada la tecla de maysculas y haga clic en cualquier parte dentro del crculo:
Esto permite situar el indicador del balance de color en la posicin indicada por el puntero del
ratn para realizar ajustes significativos con rapidez.

Haga clic dos veces dentro del crculo: Se restablecen los valores originales sin reajustar el control
general para dicho parmetro.

Haga clic en el botn de reajuste situado en la esquina superior derecha: Se restablecen


todos los ajustes.

Controles generales
Los controles generales situados debajo de cada crculo cromtico permiten ajustar las sombras, tonos
intermedios y luces en cada canal YRGB.
Para realizar ajustes mediante el control general:

Mueva los controles generales hacia la izquierda o derecha
para realizar ajustes.

Arrastre el control hacia la izquierda o la derecha: Hacia la izquierda se oscurece el parmetro


seleccionado de la imagen y a la derecha se aclara. Al ajustar un valor el cambio se ver reflejado
en los parmetros YRGB. Para ajustar solo la luminancia, mantenga presionada la tecla ALT o
Command y arrastre el control a la izquierda o derecha. El corrector procesa el color y la luminancia
por separado, de modo que es posible lograr efectos interesantes modificando solo el canal Y.
Este ajuste funciona mejor si el control Lum Mix se desliza a la derecha. Si se encuentra sobre
el lado izquierdo, el programa procesar los canales de color de forma normal. Por lo general, la
mayora de los coloristas utilizan el mtodo YRGB, ya que permite obtener un mayor control del
balance de color sin afectar la luminancia general para lograr la apariencia deseada ms rpido.

Contraste
Este control permite ajustar la distancia entre los valores ms claros y oscuros de una imagen. El efecto es
similar al que se obtiene realizando ajustes opuestos mediante los controles generales situados debajo de
Lift y Gain. El valor preestablecido es 50%.
Mueva los controles hacia la izquierda o derecha para ajustar
el contraste, la saturacin, el matiz y la mezcla de luminancia.

Saturacin
Este control permite aumentar o disminuir la cantidad de color en la imagen. El valor preestablecido es 50%.

156 Uso del programa de control


Matiz
Este control permite modificar los matices de la imagen recorriendo el permetro del crculo cromtico.
El valor predeterminado de 180 grados muestra la distribucin original del matiz. Al incrementarlo o disminuirlo,
todos los matices se modificarn en sentido horario o antihorario en el crculo cromtico.
Ajustes para el contraste, la saturacin,
el matiz y la mezcla de luminancia

Mezcla de luminancia
Las funciones de etalonaje en la Studio Camera estn basadas en las herramientas de correccin primaria
de DaVinci Resolve. Este programa fue desarrollado a principio de los aos 80 y es el ms utilizado en la
produccin de largometrajes en Hollywood.
El corrector de color de la cmara incluye funciones sumamente tiles y creativas. Una de ellas es el mtodo
de procesamiento YRGB.
Al corregir el color, se puede seleccionar cualquiera de los dos mtodos de procesamiento. Aquellos coloristas
con ms experiencia usan YRGB, ya que ofrece un control ms preciso sobre el color y permite ajustar los
canales en forma independiente, lo cual brinda ms opciones creativas.
Cuando el control Lum Mix se desliza totalmente a la derecha, se utiliza el modo YRGB. Si se desliza totalmente
a la izquierda, se emplea el modo RGB. Asimismo, se puede seleccionar cualquier posicin intermedia para
obtener una mezcla de ambos modos de correccin.
Cul es el mejor ajuste? Esto depende del usuario, ya que el proceso de etalonaje es totalmente creativo y
no es posible decir que algo es correcto o incorrecto. El ajuste ms apropiado depende de las preferencias
del usuario y de lo que luzca bien segn su criterio.

Sincronizacin de ajustes
El mezclador transmite la seal de control a la cmara cuando ambos dispositivos estn conectados. Si se
modifica un ajuste por error en la cmara, el mdulo de control del mezclador restablecer automticamente
los valores para mantener la sincronizacin.

Developer
Information

157 Developer Information


Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct devices
that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to open up our protocols and
we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control messages
embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device addressing
is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are packed
from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as, and can be
assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of VANC
line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of 255
bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a maximum of one
frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame, it should
use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority messages can
be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

158 Developer Information


Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data block.
The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.

Destination device (uint8)


Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual devices
are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate a broadcast
message to all devices.

Command length (uint8)


The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length of
the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of the
header or any trailing padding bytes.

Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message type
being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they do not
understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands that apply to
multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are device specific.

Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set to zero.

Command data (uint8[])


The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The format of
the data section is defined by the command itself.

Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes. Any padding
bytes are NOT included in the command length.

Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to determine
which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant or unknown
commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

159 Developer Information


Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration

Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.

Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters
available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters.
Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters that apply to multiple
types of devices.

Data type (uint8)


The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length is
used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message must
contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

160 Developer Information


128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with 5
bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.

Operation type (uint8)


The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified parameter.
Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each element
will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type.
This operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other value
for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be clamped
according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through 255
are available for device specific purposes..

Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number
of elements.

The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

161 Developer Information


Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

0.0

1.0

Interpretation

.0

Focus

fixed16

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

0.0=near, 1.0=far

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))

.3

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

trigger instantaneous auto aperture

.6

Optical image stabilisation

boolean

true=enabled, false=disabled

Video mode

int8

trigger instantaneous autofocus

1
.0

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] = dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k DCI,


6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

162 Developer Information


Group

ID

Audio

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Mic level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.1

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic level


input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6
Output

Parameter

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides


Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

163 Developer Information


Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

Reserved

Interpretation

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

164 Developer Information


Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus


on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on camera 4


(10 ms = 10000 us = 0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01

select 1080p 23.98 mode on all


cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma adjust for 16


green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

76

Ayuda

165 Ayuda
Cmo obtener ayuda
La forma ms rpida de obtener ayuda es visitando las pginas de soporte tcnico en el sitio web de Blackmagic
Design, donde podr acceder al material de apoyo ms reciente disponible para la cmara.

Pginas de soporte tcnico de Blackmagic Design


Las versiones ms recientes del manual, el software y el material de apoyo estn disponibles en el Centro de
Soporte Tcnico de Blackmagic Design (www.blackmagicdesign.com/support).

Cmo ponerse en contacto con Blackmagic Design para obtener ayuda


Si no es posible encontrar la ayuda que necesita en el material de apoyo, utilice el botn "Enviar correo
electrnico" en la pgina de soporte para enviar una solicitud de asistencia tcnica. De manera alternativa,
haga clic en el botn Soporte tcnico local para ponerse en contacto con el centro de atencin ms cercano.

Cmo comprobar la versin del software instalada actualmente


Para comprobar la versin del programa Blackmagic Camera Utility instalada en el ordenador, abra la ventana
denominada About Blackmagic Camera Utility.
En Mac OS X, ejecute el programa desde la carpeta de aplicaciones. Seleccione About
Blackmagic Camera Utility desde el men para ver el nmero de versin.
En Windows, abra el programa desde el men Inicio o la pantalla de inicio. Haga clic sobre el
men Ayuda y seleccione About Blackmagic Camera Utility para ver el nmero de versin.

Cmo obtener las ltimas actualizaciones del software


Luego de verificar la versin del programa instalada en el ordenador, visite el Centro de Soporte Tcnico en
www.blackmagicdesign.com/support para comprobar si hay actualizaciones disponibles. Aunque generalmente
es una buena idea ejecutar las ltimas actualizaciones, evite actualizar cualquier programa si se encuentra
en medio un proyecto importante.

Reemplazo de la batera
La batera de la Studio Camera no puede ser reemplazada por el usuario. Si fuera necesario cambiarla,
deber enviar la cmara al centro de servicio tcnico ms cercano para efectuar el reemplazo. Si la cmara
se encuentra fuera de garanta, ser necesario abonar una pequea tarifa por el importe de la batera, la
mano de obra y el retorno de la misma. Srvase contactar al servicio de soporte tcnico de Blackmagic Design
para ms detalles sobre dnde debe enviarse la cmara, cmo embalarla en forma segura y cunto costar
el reemplazo en su pas.

Garanta

166 Garanta
12 meses de garanta limitada
Blackmagic Design garantiza que el producto adquirido no presentar defectos en los materiales o en su
fabricacin por un perodo de 12 meses a partir de la fecha de compra del mismo. Si un producto resulta
defectuoso durante el perodo de validez de la garanta, Blackmagic Design podr optar por reemplazarlo
o repararlo sin costo alguno por concepto de piezas y/o mano de obra.
Para acceder al servicio proporcionado bajo los trminos de esta garanta, el Cliente deber dar aviso del
defecto a Blackmagic Design antes del vencimiento del perodo de garanta y encargarse de los arreglos
necesarios para la prestacin del mismo. El Cliente ser responsable por el empaque y el envo del producto
defectuoso al centro de servicio tcnico designado por Blackmagic Design y deber abonar las tarifas postales
por adelantado. El cliente ser responsable de todos los gastos de envo, seguros, aranceles, impuestos y
cualquier otro importe que surja con relacin a la devolucin de productos por cualquier motivo.
Esta garanta carecer de validez ante defectos o daos causados por un uso indebido o por falta de cuidado
y mantenimiento. Blackmagic Design no tendr obligacin de prestar el servicio estipulado en esta garanta
para (a) reparar daos provocados por intentos de personal ajeno a Blackmagic Design de instalar, reparar
o realizar un mantenimiento del producto; (b) reparar daos resultantes del uso de equipos incompatibles o
conexiones a los mismos; (c) reparar cualquier dao o mal funcionamiento provocado por el uso de piezas o
repuestos no suministrados por Blackmagic Design; o (d) brindar servicio tcnico a un producto que haya sido
modificado o integrado con otros productos, cuando dicha modificacin o integracin tenga como resultado
un aumento de la dificultad o el tiempo necesario para reparar el producto. ESTA GARANTA OFRECIDA POR
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN REEMPLAZA CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTA, EXPRESA O IMPLCITA. POR MEDIO DE
LA PRESENTE, BLACKMAGIC DESIGN Y SUS DISTRIBUIDORES RECHAZAN CUALQUIER GARANTA IMPLCITA
DE COMERCIALIZACIN O IDONEIDAD PARA UN PROPSITO PARTICULAR. LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN EN CUANTO A LA REPARACIN O SUSTITUCIN DE PRODUCTOS DEFECTUOSOS
CONSTITUYE UNA COMPENSACIN COMPLETA Y EXCLUSIVA PROPORCIONADA AL CLIENTE POR
CUALQUIER DAO INDIRECTO, ESPECIAL, FORTUITO O EMERGENTE, AL MARGEN DE QUE BLACKMAGIC
DESIGN O SUS DISTRIBUIDORES HAYAN SIDO ADVERTIDOS CON ANTERIORIDAD SOBRE LA POSIBILIDAD
DE TALES DAOS. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE POR EL USO ILEGAL DE EQUIPOS
POR PARTE DEL CLIENTE. BLACKMAGIC DESIGN NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE POR DAOS CAUSADOS POR
EL USO DE ESTE PRODUCTO. EL USUARIO UTILIZA EL PRODUCTO BAJO SU PROPIA RESPONSABILIDAD.
Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design. Todos los derechos reservados. Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink,
Videohub Workgroup, Multibridge Pro", Multibridge Extreme, Intensity y Leading the creative video
revolution son marcas registradas en los EE.UU. y en otros pases. Todas las dems marcas comerciales y nombres de
productos pertenecen a sus respectivas compaas.

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X
Windows

201410

Welcome

Blackmagic Studio Camera


Blackmagic Studio Camera
Tally

Tally
Blackmagic Studio Camera

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Tally
MFT

HyperDeck Shuttle

Grant Petty
Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Studio Camera

170

173
175

182
183

ATEM Software Control

Blackmagic Studio Camera

170

184

172

185

172

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector

187

189

Blackmagic Studio Camera -

173

Blackmagic Studio Camera -

174

190

Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol

190

Overview

190

Assumptions

190

175

Blanking Encoding

190

176

Message Grouping

190

177

178

179

180

Studio Camera

181

184

181

181

Blackmagic Camera Utility

183

183

198
199

170
Blackmagic Studio Camera

1. TALLY
177
2. LANC
2.5mmLANC173
3.
0.25TRSPGM173
4.
0.206TRS173
5.
21/4XLR173

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

PUSH

12V

10

6. /
2845174
7. SDI
SDI174
8. SDI
SDIPGM174
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

9.
BB174
10.
12 24V174

PUSH

PUSH

171
11

11. 10LCD
177

12

12. TALLY

13. FOCUS
LCD179
14. IRIS
179
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

15. PTT
180

22

16. PGM
180
17. LUT

23

18.
LCD180
19. SET
180
20. DISPLAY
180
21. MENU
LCD180

OPTICAL OUT

22.

172180

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

23. USB
USB mini B182

REF

12V

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

172

Blackmagic Studio Camera


Blackmagic

PUSH

PUSH

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Studio Camera
SDI IN

Studio Camera

LCDLCD

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

173
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
LANC
2.5mm
LANC
MFTLANC
Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S.
Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S.
12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M.Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3

SDI
15161516

SDI1516

XLR
SDI12

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

174
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
/
LCStudio Camera HD3G-SDIStudio Camera
4K6G-SDI28
45SDI

SDI
SDI Out10-bit 4:2:2SDISDI
Blackmagic Studio Camera HD3G-SDIStudio Camera 4K12G-SDI

SDI
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

SDIPGM
SDI
Blackmagic Hyperdeck ShuttleStudio CameraHyperdeck
SDI

BB

REF

12 24VStudio Camera HD
4Studio Camera 4K3
12V

Studio Camera

175 Studio Camera

MENUBlackmagic Studio Camera


SET

Video Format

Gain
0dB6dB18dB

White Balance

3200K
4500K
5000K5600K6500K7500K

Shutter Speed
Camera

ISO151/501/2000

Studio Camera HD
and Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

Film
Studio Camera HDFilmLog Gamma
DaVinci Resolve
Video
Studio Camera HDStudio Camera 4KVideoREC709

Language

176 Studio Camera

Blackmagic Studio CameraMENU

Audio Input
XLR

Microphone Level
Studio Camera
12

Input Level
Line
Mic LowMic High

Audio

Ch 1 Input1
11

Ch 2 Input2
22

Phantom Power
AudioOnOffXLR

10
Line

177 Studio Camera

LCDMENU

Brightness
LCD60%

Zebra
Blackmagic

Medium

Focus Peaking
OffLowMediumHigh
Medium

Tally BrightnessTally
Monitoring

TallyLowMediumHighMedium

178 Studio Camera

MENU

Camera Number
Studio CameraATEMTally
1991

Reference Source
Studio CameraSDI

Reference Timing

Headset Level
50%

Headset Mic Level


Studio

50%

Program Mix
LCD

0%

179 Studio Camera

Blackmagic Studio Camera


LCD
SDI
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET
FOCUS

DISPLAY

MENU

Studio CameraFOCUS
FOCUSFOCUS
FOCUS
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

IRIS
FOCUSFOCUS

VideoIRIS
FilmIRIS
Studio Camera

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

IRIS

DISPLAY

MENU

180 Studio Camera

PTT

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

PGM

DISPLAY

MENU

SDI

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

LUT
Studio CameraPTTPGM

SET

DISPLAY
LCDSDI

MENU

181

Blackmagic Studio Camera10-bit 4:2:2SDI


ATEM Camera Converters
Studio CameraSDI
OPTICAL OUT

Studio CameraBB
VTR

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

SDIStudio Camera

REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

12V

SDI OUT

SDIHyperdeckSDI
HyperdeckSDISDI

Studio CameraSDIBlackmagic Hyperdeck


ShuttleSSDSDIHyperdeckSDIStudio Camera
SDILCD

Blackmagic Camera
Utility

PUSH

182 Blackmagic Camera Utility


PUSH

Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Utility
Blackmagic Camera Installer

Windows
Blackmagic Camera UtilityBlackmagic Camera Utility
PDFBlackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera UtilityUSB


Mini B USB 2.0
Blackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera Utility

Mini B USB 2.0

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

183

Studio CameraLCD
6Studio Camera
2

LANC

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

ATEM Software Control

184 ATEM Software Control

ATEM Software ControlCamera Control


Blackmagic Studio Camera
DaVinci Resolve

ATEMATEMSDI
ATEMSDI
SDISDISDI

SDI
Blackmagic Studio CameraSDI OutATEMSDI In

ATEM Camera Control


PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

IN
2

HDMI IN

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

HD

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

HD

PREVIEW

HD

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

MULTI-VIEW

CH 1

CH 2

1
R

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

HD

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

OUT

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

IN

PGM SDI

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

SDI OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

SDI OUT

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

CH 1CH 1

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

Blackmagic Studio CameraOptical Out/InATEM Studio ConverterOptical


Out/In

PRESS TO TALK

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

PUSH

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

HD

Blackmagic Studio CameraATEM


SDI

HD

STEREO
IN
PUSH

Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings>Camera Number


1Studio CameraATEM
Cam 1Camera Number1Tally

CH 1

SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

PUSH

STEREO IN

LOCK TO TALK

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

ATEMSDIMulti ViewStudio Camera


SDI InMulti ViewSDI

REMOTE

IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

ATEM Studio Converter


Blackmagic Studio Camera

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

IN

ATEM Studio ConverterSDI OutATEMSDI In

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

OUT

ATEMSDIMulti ViewATEM Studio Converter


SDI InMulti ViewSDI
SDI OUT

IN

IN

IN

Blackmagic Studio CameraMENUStudio Settings>Camera Number


Studio Camera 1ATEM
Cam 11Tally

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

OPTICAL OUT/IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

ATEM Software ControlPreferences


TallyBlackmagic Studio Camera
TallyPGM

185 ATEM Software Control

ATEM Software ControlCamera

Aux

Aux
Aux

On Air
On Air

DaVinci ResolveYRGBLiftGamma
Gain

YRGB
LiftGammaGain

YRGBLiftGammaGain

/Paste

LiftGammaGainContrastHue
SaturationLum Mix
CoarsePaste
Paste

Paste

186 ATEM Software Control


/
/

Shift
Maccommand
WindowsControl

Coarse
Coarse/
CoarseCoarse
Coarse

/Coarse

187 ATEM Software Control


Gain

dB

Gain

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


CCU

Blackmagic Studio CameraDaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


Blackmagic Studio CameraDaVinci Resolve
DaVinci Resolve

DaVinci Resolve

188 ATEM Software Control

Lift/Gamma/Gain
LiftGammaGain

RGB

Shift

LiftGammaGain

YRGBLiftGammaGain

YRGBY
ALTCommandYRGB
YLum Mix
YRGBRGB
DaVinci ResolveYRGB

Contrast
ContrastLiftGain
50%
ContrastSaturation
HueLum Mix

Saturation
Saturation50%

189 ATEM Software Control


Hue
Hue180

Lum Mix
ContrastSaturationHueLum
Mix

Blackmagic Studio CameraDaVinci ResolveDaVinci20


80DaVinci Resolve
Blackmagic Studio CameraYRGB

RGBYRGBYRGB

Lum Mix100%YRGBLum Mix100%


RGBLum Mix0100RGBYRGB

ATEMBlackmagic Studio Camera


Studio Camera

Developer Information

190 Developer Information


Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct
devices that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to open up our
protocols and we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device
addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are packed
from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as, and can be
assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

191 Developer Information


Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data
block. The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.
Destination device (uint8)
Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual
devices are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to
indicate a broadcast message to all devices.
Command length (uint8)
The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the
length of the included command data. The length does NOT include the
length of the header or any trailing padding bytes.
Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message
type being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they
do not understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands
that apply to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are
device specific.
Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set
to zero.
Command data (uint8[])
The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data. The
format of the data section is defined by the command itself.
Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes. Any
padding bytes are NOT included in the command length.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant
or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

192 Developer Information


Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.
Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration
parameters available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are
device specific parameters. Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for
parameters that apply to multiple types of devices.
Data type (uint8)
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length
is used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each
message must contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values
meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

193 Developer Information


128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number
with 5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional
component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
Operation type (uint8)
The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified
parameter. Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each
element will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean
type. This operation will trigger the action associated with that
parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other
value for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to
the current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be
clamped according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through
255 are available for device specific purposes..
Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

194 Developer Information


Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

0.0

1.0

0.0=near, 1.0=far

.0

Focus

fixed16

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber = sqrt(2^AV))

.3

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

trigger instantaneous auto aperture

.6

Optical image
stabilisation

boolean

true=enabled, false=disabled

Video mode

int8

trigger instantaneous autofocus

1
.0

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] =
dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k


DCI, 6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values


from minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

195 Developer Information


Group

ID

Audio

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Mic level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.1

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic


level input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6
Output

Parameter

Phantom power

boolean

Overlays

uint16 bit field

true = powered, false = not powered

3
.0

0x1 = display status


0x2 = display guides

Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

196 Developer Information


Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

Reserved

Interpretation

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

197 Developer Information


Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus 8


on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on
camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 us =
0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27 0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01 0

select 1080p 23.98 mode on all


cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma adjust


16
for green & blue(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01 0

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

76

198

Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Support Centerwww.blackmagicdesign.com/support

Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Camera UtilityAbout Blackmagic Camera


Utility
Mac OS XBlackmagic Camera Utility
About Blackmagic Camera Utility
WindowsBlackmagic Camera UtilityHelp
About Blackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera Utilitywww.blackmagicdesign.


com/supportBlackmagic Support Center

Studio CameraBlackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design Support

199
12
Blackmagic Design12
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Design1. Blackmagic Design


2. 3.
Blackmagic Design 4.

BLACKMAGIC DESIGNBLACKMAGIC DESIGN


BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN

BLACKMAGIC DESIGNBLACKMAGIC DESIGN

Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design.


Blackmagic Design
DeckLink
HDLink
Workgroup Videohub
Multibridge Pro
Multibridge Extreme
IntensityLeading the creative video revolution

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X
Windows

2014 10


Blackmagic Studio Camera .
Blackmagic Studio Camera .

!
. ,

.
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
,
.
. , !
,
Blackmagic Studio Camera !
!
Blackmagic Studio Camera , , ,
MFT .
!
,
! , HyperDeck
Shuttle !
Studio Camera
!
!


Blackmagic Design CEO

Blackmagic Studio Camera

203

206
208

214
215
216

217

ATEM

Blackmagic Studio Camera

203

217

205

218

205

DaVinci Resolve

220

222

Blackmagic Studio Camera -

206

Blackmagic Studio Camera -

207

223

Developer Information
Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol

Studio Camera

223

Overview

223

Assumptions

223

(Camera Settings)

208

Blanking Encoding

223

(Audio Settings)

209

Message Grouping

223

(Monitoring Settings)

210

(Studio Settings)

211

(Adjusting Settings)

212

(Additional Settings)

213

214

214

Blackmagic Camera Utility


216

216

231
232

203
Blackmagic Studio Camera

1.
"" . 210 .
2. LANC
, , LANC 2.5mm . 206 .
3.
PGM 0.25" TRS . 206 .
4.
0.206" TRS . 206 .
5.
1/4" XLR . 206 .

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

PUSH

12V

10

6. /
/ 28( 45Km) . 207 .
7. SDI
SDI . 207 .
8. SDI
PGM SDI . 207 .
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

9. REF
(tri-level) . 207
.
10.
12 24V . 207 .

PUSH

204
PUSH

11

11. 10" LCD


. 210 .

12

12.
""
.
13 (FOCUS)
1 , LCD . 212 .
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

18

19

18

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

14. (IRIS)
1 . 212 .
15. (PTT)
.
. . 213 .

22

16. (PGM)
. 213
.

23

17. (LUT)
.
18.
LCD . 213 .
19. (SET)
. 213 .
20. (DISPLAY)
. 213 .
21. (MENU)
LCD . 213 .
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

22. (POWER)
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
. 205 213 .

REF

12V

23. USB
USB B . 215 .
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

205

Blackmagic Studio Camera .
.
Blackmagic Camera , .
:

PUSH

PUSH

1 .

. , ,
.

2 .

3 .

12
.


.
2

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Studio Camera
SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V


Studio Camera
. ,
.
1 .

LCD . LCD .

2 .

206
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
LANC
, , ,
. 2.5mm LANC .
MFT LANC .
:
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S Lens
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S Lens
Olympus 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M.Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3 Lens


() .

. SDI/ 15
16 . 15 16
.


. SDI 15 16
.

PUSH


3
2

PUSH

XLR 2 .
. ,
. SDI 1 2
.

207
Blackmagic Studio Camera -
/
/ LC Studio Camera HD 3G-SDI Studio Camera 4K
6G-SDI .
. , 28( 45Km)
. SDI ,
.

SDI
SDI 10 4:2:2 , , SDI ,
SDI . Blackmagic Studio Camera HD 3G-SDI
Studio Camera 4K 12G-SDI .
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

SDI
SDI PGM . PGM
.
SDI , . Studio Camera
Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle , Hyperdeck SDI
.

REF
(tri-level) .
, .

REF

12V

12-24V . Studio
Camera HD 4 Studio Camera 4K 3 .

Studio Camera

208 Studio Camera


(Camera Settings)
MENU Blackmagic Studio .
SET .

Video Format
. .

Gain
. 0dB
6dB 18dB .

White Balance
6 .
3200K
4500K
5000K, 5600K, 6500K, 7500K.

Shutter Speed

(Camera Settings)

ISO . 1/50 1/2000


15 .

Dynamic Range

Studio Camera HD
and Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

Language

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

. , , , , , ,
.

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

Film
Studio Camera HD
, DaVinci Resolve
.
Video
Studio Camera HD Studio Camera 4K HD
REC709 .

209 Studio Camera


(Audio Settings)
Blackmagic Studio Camera , MENU
.

Audio Input
XLR .

Microphone Level
.
. Studio Camera .
, 1 2 .

Input Level
.
Line . Mic Low Mic High
.
.
(Audio Settings)

/ .

Ch 1 Input
1 .
1 .

Ch 2 Input
2 .
2 .

Phantom Power
On/Off XLR
. ,
. 10
.
.
Line .

210 Studio Camera


(Monitoring Settings)
LCD MENU .

Brightness
/ LCD . 60%.

Zebra
Blackmagic Cameras .
.
/ .
.

Focus Peaking
. (off), (low), (medium), (high)
. .
.
(Monitoring Settings)

Tally Brightness
. (low), (medium), (high) .
.

211 Studio Camera


(Studio Settings)
MENU , LCD .

Camera Number
ATEM Studio Camera .
. 1-99
. 1 .

Reference Source
. Studio Camera SDI
. ,
.

Reference Timing
.

Headset Level
(Studio Settings)

. 50%.

Headset Mic Level


. 50%
.

Program Mix
. LCD
. , .
. 0%.

212 Studio Camera


(Adjusting Settings)
Blackmagic Studio Camera
.
. LCD , SDI .
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

Focus

DISPLAY

MENU

Studio Camera , FOCUS


. FOCUS . FOCUS
.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

FOCUS .
FOCUS
.

, FOCUS .

Iris
, IRIS
. , IRIS
.
Studio Camera / .

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

IRIS ,
/ .

DISPLAY

MENU

213 Studio Camera


(Additional Settings)
(PTT)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET


. PTT .
DISPLAY
MENU
. .

(PGM)
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Studio Camera PTT PGM


.

, .
PGM
. SDI .

(LUT)
.

///
.

Set
.

Display
LCD . SDI
.

Menu
Menu .

Power
Blackmagic Studio Camera .
.

214

Blackmagic Studio Cameras 10 4:2:2 SDI
. / ATEM Camera Converter
.
Studio Camera SDI (PGM)
.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Studio Camera Tri-level


. , VTR,
, .

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN


SDI OUT

SDI IN

Studio Camera SDI


.
REF

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

SDI Hyperdeck SDI


Hyperdeck SDI SDI
.

12V

Studio Camera , SDI Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle SSD


SDI . , Hyperdeck SDI Studio Camera SDI
, LCD .

Blackmagic Camera
Utility

PUSH

215 Blackmagic Camera Utility


PUSH

Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Utility .
.
Blackmagic Camera .

Windows
Blackmagic Camera Utility . Blackmagic Camera
Utility PDF Blackmagic Camera Utility .
.


Blackmagic Camera Utility USB .
USB 2.0 . Blackmagic Camera Utility
.

Blackmagic Camera Utility

USB 2.0 .

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

216

Studio Camera LCD


.
1 .

Studio Camera 6 .

2 .



. , , LANC
. Studio Camera 3/8
10 1/4 . ,
.

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

ATEM

217 ATEM

ATEM Software Control ATEM Blackmagic Studio Camera
. . ,
, , DaVinci Resolve
.
ATEM SDI
. , ATEM SDI
SDI . SDI SDI
.

SDI
ATEM Camera Control
PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

IN
2

HDMI IN

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

3
L

IN
10

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HD

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

HD

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

PUSH

HD

HD

+12V BACKUP
POWER

HD

STEREO
IN
PUSH

HD

3 .

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

AUX 1-3

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

REMOTE

STEREO IN

PUSH

HD

PREVIEW

HD

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

CH 1

CH 2

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

SDI OUT

MULTI-VIEW

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

OUT

OUT

SDI OUT

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

IN

PGM SDI

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

+12V BACKUP
POWER

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

SDI OUT

USB 2.0

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

CH 2CH 2

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO OUT


1 .

Blackmagic Studio Camera / ATEM Studio Converter /


.

2 4 .

ATEM Studio Converter SDI ATEM SDI .

3 .
IN

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

Blackmagic Studio Camera ATEM Studio


Converter .

MIC

H/PHONE

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

OUT

OUT

ATEM SDI ATEM Studio


Converter SDI . SDI
.

SDI OUT

IN

OPTICAL OUT/IN

4 .
1
L

CH 1CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO IN

PRESS TO TALK

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

Blackmagic Studio Camera Menu . Studio Settings>Camera Number


. , studio camera
1 ATEM Cam 1 , 1 .
.
CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

HD

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

ATEM SDI Studio Camera


SDI . SDI
.

STEREO IN

Blackmagic Studio Camera ATEM SDI


.

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

2 .
REMOTE

CH 1
SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

Blackmagic Studio Camera SDI ATEM SDI .

LOCK TO TALK

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

REMOTE

1 .

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Blackmagic Studio Camera Menu . Studio Settings>Camera Number


. , Studio Camera
1 ATEM Cam 1 , 1 .
.

ATEM Software Control Preference


. Blackmagic Studio Camera
PGM
.

218 ATEM

ATEM Software Control .



. .
.



.
, .
,
.

Channel
, On Air ,
. .
On Air .

Color Wheel
On Air
.
YRGB , , .

DaVinci Resolve YRGB , ,


.
.

Master Wheel
YRGB , //
.

Reset
, , ,
. .
/ . .

,
.

.

//
, , , .
/ , . /
, , , .
, .
.

219 ATEM
/
.
.
/ . SHIFT
.
/ . Mac COMMAND
, Windows CONTROL .

Coarse
Coarse / .
.
Coarse , Coarse
/ . , Coarse
.


/
. Coarse .


/
.

.
.

.
.



.
/ .

/
.

220 ATEM

.
.
(db) / / .
. ,
.
.
, ,
,
.


/ .
/ / .
.

.
.

White Balance
/ .
, .
.

DaVinci Resolve
CCU

.
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci Resolve . DaVinci
Resolve , Blackmagic Studio Camera
.

.

DaVinci Resolve
.

, ,
.
.

221 ATEM

//
. , , , , .
:
:
. RGB
.
// .

Shift :
.
:
.
:
.


YRGB , ,
.
:

/
.

/ :
.
YRGB . ALT Command /
Y . YRGB , Y
. Lum Mix
YRGB Y
RGB . , DaVinci Resolve
YRGB . ,

.

Contrast
.
. 50%.

Saturation
/ , , ,
.

. 50%.

222 ATEM
Hue
. 180
.
.
, , ,

Lum Mix
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci Resolve
. DaVinci 1980 ,
DaVinci Resolve .
Blackmagic Studio Camera
. YRGB .
, RGB YRGB .
YRGB
.
Lum Mix YRGB 100% . Lum
Mix RGB 100% . Lum Mix /
RGB YRGB .
? .
!


Blackmagic Studio Camera ATEM .
Studio Camera ,
.

Developer Information

223 Developer Information


Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to
construct devices that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to
open up our protocols and we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device
addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined
as, and can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region
of VANC line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum
of 255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a
maximum of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame,
it should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

224 Developer Information


Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data
block. The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.
Destination device (uint8)
Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual
devices are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate a broadcast message to all devices.
Command length (uint8)
The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the
length of the included command data. The length does NOT include the
length of the header or any trailing padding bytes.
Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message
type being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they
do not understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands
that apply to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are
device specific.
Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be
set to zero.
Command data (uint8[])
The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data.
The format of the data section is defined by the command itself.
Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes.
Any padding bytes are NOT included in the command length.
Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to
determine which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant
or unknown commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

225 Developer Information


Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.
Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration
parameters available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device
specific parameters. Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters that apply to multiple types of devices.
Data type (uint8)
The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length
is used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message must contain an integral number of data elements.
Currently defined values are:
0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values
meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

226 Developer Information


128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number
with 5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional
component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.
Operation type (uint8)
The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified
parameter. Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each
element will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type.
This operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any
other value for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to
the current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be
clamped according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through
255 are available for device specific purposes..
Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and
number of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

227 Developer Information


Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

.0

Focus

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=near, 1.0=far

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber =


sqrt(2^AV))

.3

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values from


minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto aperture

void

trigger instantaneous auto aperture

.6

Optical image stabilisation

boolean

true=enabled, false=disabled

Video mode

int8

trigger instantaneous autofocus

1
.0

[0] = frame
rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] = dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k


DCI, 6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values


from minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

228 Developer Information


Group

ID

Parameter

Type

Audio

2
.0

Mic level

.1

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic


level input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

.6
Output

Index

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides


Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

229 Developer Information


Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD

Reserved

Interpretation

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

230 Developer Information


Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet Byte
Length
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto


focus on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on camera 4 (10 ms = 10000 us


= 0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27 0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01 0

select 1080p 23.98 mode


on all cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma


adjust for green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

16

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

76

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01 0

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

231

Blackmagic Design
.

Blackmagic Design
Blackmagic (www.blackmagicdesign.com/kr/support) , ,
.

Blackmagic Design
[ ]
. , [
] Blackmagic Design .


Blackmagic Camera Utility Blackmagic Camera
Utility .
Mac OS X Blackmagic Camera Utility .
About Blackmagic Camera .
Windows Blackmagic Camera Utility .
About Blackmagic Camera Utility .


Blackmagic Camera Utility Blackmagic
(www.blackmagicdesign.com/kr/support) .
,
.


Studio Camera .
Blackmagic Design .
, , ,
. Blackmagic Design ,
.

232
12
Blackmagic Design 12
. , Blackmagic Design
.
Blackmagic Design
. Blackmagic Design
.
, , , , .
, .
Blackmagic Design . a) Blackmagic Design
. b)
. c) Blackmagic Design . d)
. BLACKMAGIC
DESIGN . BLACKMAGIC
DESIGN .
BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC
DESIGN ,
, . BLACKMAGIC DESIGN
. BLACKMAGIC
.
.
Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design. . Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub, Multibridge
Pro, Multibridge Extreme, Intensity, Leading the creative video revolution .
.

Blackmagic Studio Camera

Mac OS X
Windows

2014 .

!
Blackmagic Studio Camera.
,
.

, .
,
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
.
, .
Blackmagic Studio Camera
,
.

,
MFT.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
. ,

.

HyperDeck Shuttle.
,
.
!

Grant Petty
Blackmagic Design

Blackmagic Studio Camera

250 
ATEM Software Control

236 

Blackmagic Studio Camera

236

250

238

251

238

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector

253

255

239 

Blackmagic Studio Camera

239

Blackmagic Studio Camera

240

241 
Studio Camera

256 Developer Information


Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol

256

Overview

256

Assumptions

256

241

Blanking Encoding

256

242

Message Grouping

256

243

244

245

246

247 

247

247

248 Blackmagic Camera Utility


249 

249

249

264 

265 

236
Blackmagic Studio Camera


1.
, . . . 243.
2. LANC
2,5 ,
LANC. . . 239.
3.
TRS 0,25
. . . 239.
4.
TRS 0,206
. . . 239.

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

3
SDI OUT

SDI IN

PUSH

7
8
9

REF

5.
XLR 1/4 . . . 239.
6. /
45 . .
. 240.

PUSH

12V

10

7. SDI
SDI . . . 240.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

8. SDI
SDI (PGM). . . 240.
9.
blackburst tri-level. . .
240.
10.
1224 . . . 240.

PUSH

237
PUSH

11

11. 10- -
, . .
. 243.

12

12.
. , .
13. FOCUS

-. . . 245.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

13

14

15

16

17

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

20

21

14. IRIS

. . . 245.
18

19

18

22

15. PUSH TO TALK (PTT)


.
. . . . 246.
16. PROGRAM (PGM)


. . . 246.

23

17. LOOK UP TABLE (LUT)


.
18.
-. . . 246.
19. SET
. . . 246.
20. DISPLAY

. . . 246.
21. MENU
-. . . 246.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

22.

, Blackmagic Studio Camera. ,


. . . 238 246.

REF

12V

23. USB
USB mini B . . . 248.
FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

238

Blackmagic Studio Camera .
,
. .

PUSH

PUSH

1.

. ,
.

2.

3.

, ,
12 .
.

, ,
.
2

PUSH

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

PUSH

SDI OUT

Studio Camera
SDI IN

REF


Studio Camera ,
.
, .

1.

- .
.

2.

, .

12V

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

239
Blackmagic Studio Camera
LANC
LANC ,
, .
2,5 LANC.
MFT
. :
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 14-42mm f/3.5-5.6 Power O.I.S.
Panasonic Lumix G X Vario PZ 45-175mm f/4.0-5.6 Zoom O.I.S.
Olympus 12-50mm f/3.5-6.3 ED M.Zuiko EZ Micro 4/3


.
,

. SDI-
15 16. ,
.


.
SDI- , ,
15 16.

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

XLR
. ,
.
. . SDI-
1 2.

240
Blackmagic Studio Camera
/
/ LC 3G-SDI Studio
Camera HD 6G-SDI Studio Camera 4K.
. , 45 ,
. SDI- ,
, .

SDI
SDI 10- 4:2:2 SDI-,
, , . Blackmagic Studio Camera
HD 3G-SDI, Studio Camera 4K 12G-SDI.
OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI
SDI (PGM). PGM

. SDI- ,
, . Studio Camera
, Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle, Hyperdeck
SDI, .

SDI IN

blackburst tri-level.
,
.

REF

12V

1224 .
Studio Camera HD , Studio Camera 4K
.

Studio Camera

241 Studio Camera



Blackmagic Studio Camera MENU.
,
SET.

Video Format ( )
. .

Gain ()
.
0 , 18 6 .

White Balance ( )
.
3200K ( )
4500K ( )
5000K, 5600K, 6500K 7500K ( )

Shutter Speed ( )


Studio Camera HD
and Studio Camera 4K

Studio Camera 4K

1920 x 1080p23.98

3840x2160p23.98

1920 x 1080p24

3840x2160p24

1920 x 1080p25

3840x2160p25

1920 x 1080p29.97

3840x2160p29.97

1920 x 1080p30

3840x2160p30

1920 x 1080p50

3840x2160p50

1920 x 1080p59.94

3840x2160p59.94

1920 x 1080p60

3840x2160p60

1920 x 1080i50
1920 x 1080i59.94
1920 x 1080i60

, , ISO.
15 1/50 1/2000 .

Dynamic Range ( )
Film ( )
Studio Camera HD , .
, DaVinci Resolve.
Video ( )
Studio Camera HD Studio Camera 4K REC709,

Language ()
. ,
, , , , , .

242 Studio Camera



Blackmagic Studio Camera,
MENU .

Audio Input ()
XLR.

Microphone Level ( )
.
. Studio Camera
. ,
1 2.

Input Level ( )

.
, ,
Line. Mic
Low Mic High. ,
.
.

Ch 1 Input ( 1)
1 .
1,
.

Ch 2 Input ( 2)
2 .
2,
.

Phantom Power ( )
XLR-, Audio
On (.) Off (.).
.
10
. .
Line .

243 Studio Camera



-, MENU
.

Brightness ()
- .
60%.

Zebra ( )
Blackmagic Zebra, . ,
, .
.
.

Focus Peaking ( )

. :
off (.), low ( ), medium ( ) high ( ).
, .
.

Tally Brightness ( )
. : low ( ),
medium ( ) high ( ). .

244 Studio Camera



-, MENU
.

Camera Number ( )
ATEM Studio Camera,
. .
1 99. 1.

Reference Source ( )
. Studio Camera
SDI .
,
- .

Reference Timing ( )
.

Headset Level ( )
.
50%.

Headset Mic Level ( )



. 50%.

Program Mix ( )
.
, -. ,
.
, .
0%.

245 Studio Camera



Blackmagic Studio Camera ,
, .
,
. - SDI- .
FOCUS

FOCUS

IRIS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

PTT

PGM

LUT

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

FOCUS
,
FOCUS

SET

DISPLAY

FOCUS

MENU

Studio Camera , FOCUS


.
FOCUS.
FOCUS.
,
FOCUS .

IRIS
IRIS
. IRIS
.
Studio Camera .

FOCUS

IRIS

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PTT

PGM

LUT

PGM

LUT

SET

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

IRIS ,
/

DISPLAY

MENU

246 Studio Camera



Push to Talk (PTT)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET


. .
. .

DISPLAY
MENU

Program (PGM)

FOCUS

IRIS

PTT

PGM

LUT

SET

DISPLAY

MENU

Studio Camera PTT PGM,


,
.
.
SDI- .

Look Up Table (LUT)


.

///
.

Set
.

Display
-.
SDI.

Menu
.

, Blackmagic Studio Camera. ,


.

247

Blackmagic Studio Camera 10- 4:2:2 ,
SDI-. /
ATEM Camera Converter .

, SDI .

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

REF

12V

OPTICAL OUT

Studio Camera blackburst


tri-level. ,
,
.

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

Studio Camera
SDI-

REF

12V

+12V POWER

HDMI IN

+12V POWER

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SDI IN

SDI IN

SDI OUT

SDI OUT


SDI- SDI- Hyperdeck


Studio Camera, SDI-
SSD-, Blackmagic Hyperdeck Shuttle.
SDI- Studio Camera, - .

Black magic Camera Utilit y

PUSH

248 Blackmagic Camera Utility


PUSH

Mac OS X
Blackmagic Camera Utility
.
Blackmagic Camera Installer .

Windows
Blackmagic Camera Utility ,
PDF Blackmagic Camera Utility.
.


Blackmagic Camera Utility
USB. mini USB 2.0 .

Blackmagic Camera Utility

Blackmagic Camera Utility


.

mini USB 2.0

OPTICAL OUT

OPTICAL IN

SDI OUT

SDI IN

249

Studio Camera -
.

1.

, Studio Camera.

2.

,
.



, .
, LANC-
. 3/8
1/4 .
.
2

PUSH

3
2

PUSH

ATEM Software Control

250 ATEM Software Control



ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Studio
ATEM. , Camera.
, ,
DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector.
SDI- ,
. SDI- ATEM
,
. SDI-, .

SDI
ATEM Camera Control
PRESS TO TALK

PRESS TO TALK

PUSH

IN
5

IN
3

IN
1

IN
7

IN
1

IN
9

IN
3

IN
7

IN
5

IN
9

IN
1

CONTROL

IN
4

IN
1

USB 2.0

IN
6

HDMI IN

IN
8

IN
2

IN
10

IN
4

IN
8

IN
6

SDI INPUTS

IN
1

USB 2.0

REMOTE

IN
10

HD

HD

HD

HD

REF IN

AUX 1-3

IN
1

IN
3

IN
5

IN
7

IN
9

IN
2

IN
4

IN
6

IN
8

IN
10

HDMI IN

PREVIEW
REF IN

AUXPROGRAM
1-3
OUTPUTS
PREVIEW

3
L

REMOTE

STEREO IN

SDI INPUTS

REF IN

+12V BACKUP
POWER

PUSH

AUX 1-3

HD

PREVIEW

HD

STEREO
IN
PUSH

HD

PROGRAM OUTPUTS

PUSH

PUSH

CH 1

CH 2

SDI OUT

MULTI-VIEW

L
R
L
R
USB 2.0
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

1
L

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

+12V BACKUP
POWER

IN

L
R
L
R
OPTICAL OUT/IN ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
OPTICAL OUT/IN
OUT AUDIO OUT

USB 2.0

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

SDI OUT

OPTICAL
OUT/IN
MIC

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

SDI OUT

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

CH 2

CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

2.

SDI- ATEM Studio Converter SDI-


ATEM.

OUT

IN

4
SDI OUT

CH 2CH 2

Blackmagic Studio Camera (Optical Out/In)


(Optical Out/In) ATEM Studio Converter.

3.

SDI OUT

SDI OUT

CH 1CH 1

ANALOG AUDIO
ANALOG
IN AUDIO OUT

1.

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

3OUT

PRESS TO TALK

Menu Blackmagic Studio Camera. Studio Settings>Camera Number


. ,
Studio Camera 1 Cam 1 ATEM, Camera Number
1. .
CH 2

MULTI-VIEW
ANALOG AUDIO IN

CH 2

CH 1

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

HD

3.

All SDI and HDMI video connections are


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated

ANALOG AUDIO IN

OUT

SDI OUT

All SDI and HDMI video connections are

SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable


SD, HD and Ultra HD switchable unless indicated
PUSH
PUSH unless indicated

HD

LOCK TO TALK

SDI OUT

PUSH

PROGRAM
MULTI-VIEW
OUTPUTS

Blackmagic Studio Camera SDI-


ATEM

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

SDI- ATEM ( ,
) SDI- (In) Studio Camera.
SDI-
.

CH 1
SDI INPUTS

CONTROL

2.

LOCK TO TALK
IN
2

HDMI IN

SDI- (Out) Blackmagic Studio Camera SDI- (In)


ATEM.

STEREO IN

LOCK TO TALK

TROL

REMOTE

1.

L
OPTICAL OUT/IN

R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

Blackmagic Studio
ATEM Studio Converter

MIC

H/PHONE

AES/EBU TALKBACK LOOPS

OUT

L
R
ANALOG AUDIO OUT
H/PHONE

4.

OUT

SDI- ATEM ( ,
) SDI- (In) ATEM Studio
Converter. SDI-
.

SDI OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OPTICAL OUT/IN

IN

IN

ANALOG AUDIO OUT

PGM SDI

MIC

H/PHONE

Menu Blackmagic Studio Camera. Studio Settings>Camera Number


. ,
Studio Camera 1 Cam 1 ATEM, Camera Number
1. .

ATEM Software Control Preferences ,


. Blackmagic
Studio Camera
PGM .

251 ATEM Software Control


ATEM Software Control Camera


. ,
.
.


, .
,
.
,
.


, On
Air . ,
.
On Air.


,
,
.
, ,
YRGB- .

DaVinci Resolve. ,
, YRGB- .
, .



YRGB- : ,
.


,
, .
. , /
. Paste () .

Paste to all ( )
, .

,
.

, ,
,
Contrast, Hue, Saturation Lum Mix.
, .
Paste () , , Coarse
. Paste to all ( ) ,
.
, .

252 ATEM Software Control


/
/ .
, .
, .
Shift, .
,
. Command ( Mac) Control ( Windows),
.

Coarse
Coarse /
.
.
Coarse,
, Coarse
. Coarse
.


/
,

/
. Coarse.


.
,
. ,
, .
.


,
.
.

,

253 ATEM Software Control



.
,
, .
dB.
, , ,
. , .


,
, ,


/ . ,
, .
.
, ,
. ,
, .

White Balance ( )

, .
.

DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector


, ,
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci Resolve. ,
DaVinci Resolve, Blackmagic Studio Camera
.


.
, ,
, . ,
.
DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector,

254 ATEM Software Control



Lift/Gamma/Gain
. , .

.
, .
RGB , .

Shift .
, ,
.
.
.
, .
.


, , ,
YRGB- .

.
, .
YRGB .
(Y)
ALT Command. YRGB,
.
, Lum Mix .
YRGB, RGB.
, ,
.
, .

Contrast
.
, Lift Gain,
. 50%.
Contrast, Saturation, Hue Lum Mix

Saturation
.
50%.

255 ATEM Software Control


Hue
Hue .
180 , .

.
Contrast, Saturation, Hue Lum Mix

Lum Mix
Blackmagic Studio Camera DaVinci
Resolve. DaVinci 80- . ,
.
Blackmagic Studio Camera
. YRGB.
RGB- YRGB- .
YRGB,
.
Lum Mix , 100% YRGB.
Lum Mix , 100% RGB.
Lum Mix ,
RGB YRGB.
,
.


ATEM Blackmagic Studio
Camera. - ,
.

Developer Information

256 Developer Information


Blackmagic Video Device Embedded Control Protocol
Version 1.0
If you are a software developer you can use the Video Device Embedded Control Protocol to construct
devices that integrate with our products. Here at Blackmagic Design our approach is to open up our
protocols and we eagerly look forward to seeing what you come up with!

Overview
This document describes an extensible protocol for sending a uni-directional stream of small control
messages embedded in the non-active picture region of a digital video stream.
The video stream containing the protocol stream may be broadcast to a number of devices. Device
addressing is used to allow the sender to specify which device each message is directed to.

Assumptions
Alignment and padding constraints are explicitly described in the protocol document. Bit fields are
packed from LSB first. Message groups, individual messages and command headers are defined as, and
can be assumed to be, 32 bit aligned.

Blanking Encoding
A message group is encoded into a SMPTE 291M packet with DID/SDID x51/x53 in the active region of
VANC line 16.

Message Grouping
Up to 32 messages may be concatenated and transmitted in one blanking packet up to a maximum of
255 bytes payload. Under most circumstances, this should allow all messages to be sent with a maximum
of one frame latency.
If the transmitting device queues more bytes of message packets than can be sent in a single frame, it
should use heuristics to determine which packets to prioritise and send immediately. Lower priority
messages can be delayed to later frames, or dropped entirely as appropriate.

257 Developer Information


Abstract Message Packet Format
Every message packet consists of a three byte header followed by an optional variable length data block.
The maximum packet size is 64 bytes.
Destination device (uint8)
Device addresses are represented as an 8 bit unsigned integer. Individual
devices are numbered 0 through 254 with the value 255 reserved to indicate
a broadcast message to all devices.

Command length (uint8)


The command length is an 8 bit unsigned integer which specifies the length
of the included command data. The length does NOT include the length of
the header or any trailing padding bytes.
Command id (uint8)
The command id is an 8 bit unsigned integer which indicates the message type
being sent. Receiving devices should ignore any commands that they do not
understand. Commands 0 through 127 are reserved for commands that apply
to multiple types of devices. Commands 128 through 255 are device specific.

Reserved (uint8)
This byte is reserved for alignment and expansion purposes. It should be set
to zero.

Command data (uint8[])


The command data may contain between 0 and 60 bytes of data.
The format of the data section is defined by the command itself.

Padding (uint8[])
Messages must be padded up to a 32 bit boundary with 0x0 bytes.
Any padding bytes are NOT included in the command length.

Receiving devices should use the destination device address and/or the command identifier to determine
which messages to process. The receiver should use the command length to skip irrelevant or unknown
commands and should be careful to skip the implicit padding as well.

258 Developer Information


Defined Commands
Command 0 : change configuration
Category (uint8)
The category number specifies one of up to 256 configuration categories
available on the device.

Parameter (uint8)
The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration
parameters available on the device. Parameters 0 through 127 are device
specific parameters. Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters
that apply to multiple types of devices.

Data type (uint8)


The data type specifies the type of the remaining data. The packet length is
used to determine the number of elements in the message. Each message
must contain an integral number of data elements.

Currently defined values are:


0: void / boolean
A void value is represented as a boolean array of length zero.
The data field is a 8 bit value with 0 meaning false and all other values
meaning true.
1: signed byte
Data elements are signed bytes
2: signed 16 bit integer
Data elements are signed 16 bit values
3: signed 32 bit integer
Data elements are signed 32 bit values
4: signed 64 bit integer
Data elements are signed 64 bit values
5: UTF-8 string
Data elements represent a UTF-8 string with no terminating character.
Data types 6 through 127 are reserved.

259 Developer Information


128: signed 5.11 fixed point
Data elements are signed 16 bit integers representing a real number with
5 bits for the integer component and 11 bits for the fractional component.
The fixed point representation is equal to the real value multiplied by 2^11.
The representable range is from -16.0 to 15.9995 (15 + 2047/2048).
Data types 129 through 255 are available for device specific purposes.

Operation type (uint8)


The operation type specifies what action to perform on the specified
parameter. Currently defined values are:
0: assign value
The supplied values are assigned to the specified parameter. Each
element will be clamped according to its valid range.
A void parameter may only be assigned an empty list of boolean type.
This operation will trigger the action associated with that parameter.
A boolean value may be assigned the value zero for false, and any other
value for true.
1: offset / toggle value
Each value specifies signed offsets of the same type to be added to the
current parameter values.The resulting parameter value will be clamped
according to their valid range.
It is not valid to apply an offset to a void value.
Applying any offset other than zero to a boolean value will invert that value.
Operation types 2 through 127 are reserved. Operation types 128 through
255 are available for device specific purposes..

Data (void)
The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number
of elements.
The category, parameter, data type and operation type partition a 24 bit operation space.

260 Developer Information


Group

ID

Lens

Video

Parameter

Type

.0

Focus

fixed16

.1

Instantaneous autofocus

void

.2

Aperture (f-stop)

.3

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

0.0

1.0

0.0=near, 1.0=far

fixed16

-1.0

16.0

Aperture Value (where fnumber =


sqrt(2^AV))

Aperture (normalised)

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=smallest, 1.0=largest

.4

Aperture (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available aperture values


from minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.5

Instantaneous auto
aperture

void

.6

Optical image stabilisation boolean

trigger instantaneous autofocus

trigger instantaneous auto aperture


true=enabled, false=disabled

1
.0

Video mode

int8

[0] = frame rate

24, 25, 30, 50, 60

[1] = M-rate

0=regular, 1=M-rate

[2] =
dimensions

0=NTSC, 1=PAL, 2=720, 3=1080, 4=2k, 5=2k


DCI, 6=4k, 7=4k DCI

[3] = interlaced

0=progressive, 1=interlaced

[4] = colour
space

0=YUV

.1

Sensor Gain

int8

16

1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x gain

.2

Manual White Balance

int16

3200

7500

Colour temperature in K

.3

Reserved

Reserved

.4

Reserved

Reserved

.5

Exposure (us)

int32

42000

time in us

.6

Exposure (ordinal)

int16

Steps through available exposure values


from minimum (0) to maximum (n)

.7

Dynamic Range Mode

int8 enum

0 = film, 1 = video

261 Developer Information


Group

ID

Parameter

Type

Audio

2
.0

Mic level

.1

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Headphone level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.2

Headphone program mix

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Speaker level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.4

Input type

int8

0=internal mic, 1=line level input, 2=low mic


level input, 3=high mic level input

.5

Input levels

fixed16

[0] ch0

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

[1] ch1

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.6

Output

Index

Phantom power

boolean

true = powered, false = not powered

Overlays

uint16 bit field

0x1 = display status

3
.0

0x2 = display guides

Display

4
.0

Brightness

fixed16

.1

Overlays

int16 bit field

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum
0x4 = zebra
0x8 = peaking

Tally

.2

Zebra level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.3

Peaking level

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

Tally brightness

fixed16

0.0

1.0

0.0=minimum, 1.0=maximum

.0

Source

int8 enum

0=internal, 1=program, 2=external

.1

Offset

int32

5
.0

Reference

6
+/- offset in pixels

262 Developer Information


Group

ID

Configuration

7
.0
.1

Colour
Correction

Parameter

Type

Index

Minimum

Maximum

Interpretation

Real Time Clock

int32

[0] time

BCD - HHMMSSFF

[1] date

BCD - YYYYMMDD
Reserved

Reserved

8
.0

.1

.2

.3

.4

Lift Adjust

Gamma Adjust

Gain Adjust

Offset Adjust

Contrast Adjust

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

fixed16

.5

Luma mix

fixed16

.6

Colour Adjust

fixed16

.7

Correction Reset Default

void

[0] red

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-2.0

2.0

default 0.0

[0] red

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-4.0

4.0

default 0.0

[0] red

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[1] green

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[2] blue

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[3] luma

0.0

16.0

default 1.0

[0] red

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[1] green

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[2] blue

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[3] luma

-8.0

8.0

default 0.0

[0] pivot

0.0

1.0

default 0.5

[1] adj

0.0

2.0

default 1.0

0.0

1.0

default 1.0

[0] hue

-1.0

1.0

default 0.0

[1] sat

0.0

2.0

default 1.0
reset to defaults

263 Developer Information


Example Protocol Packets
Operation

Packet
Length

Byte
0

10

11

12

13

14

15

command

reserved

category

parameter

type

operation

data

length

command

destination

header

trigger instantaneous auto focus


on camera 4

turn on OIS on all cameras

12

255

set exposure to 10 ms on camera


4
(10 ms = 10000 us = 0x00002710)

12

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

add 15% to zebra level


(15 % = 0.15 f = 0x0133 fp)

12

128

0x33

0x01

select 1080p 23.98 mode


on all cameras

16

255

24

subtract 0.3 from gamma


adjust for green & blue
(-0.3 ~= 0xfd9a fp)

16

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

all operations combined

76

255

0x10

0x27

0x00

0x00

128

0x33

0x01

255

24

12

128

0x9a

0xfd

0x9a

0xfd

264

Blackmagic
Design .

Blackmagic Design
,
Blackmagic www.blackmagicdesign.com/
support.

Blackmagic Design
,
"Send us an email" .
Blackmagic Design,
- .


Blackmagic Camera Utility, ,
About Blackmagic Camera Utility.
Mac OS X Blackmagic Camera Utility
. About Blackmagic Camera Utility, .
Windows Blackmagic Camera Utility
. About Blackmagic Camera Utility,
.


Blackmagic Camera Utility, Blackmagic
www.blackmagicdesign.com/support, .
,
.


Studio Camera , .
, Blackmagic Design.

, . ,
Blackmagic Design.

265
12
Black magic Design
12 .
, Blackmagic Design
.
, Blackmagic
Design
.
Blackmagic Design .
, ,
.
, , -
, . Black magic
Design : ) ,
, ,
Blackmagic Design; ) ,
; )
,
; ) ,

. BL ACK MAGIC DESIGN
. BL ACK MAGIC
DESIGN
- .
BL ACK MAGIC DESIGN
,
, , ,
, BL ACK M AGI C DESI GN ( )
. BL ACK MAGIC DESIGN
.
BL ACK MAGIC DESIGN ,
. ,
.
Copyright 2014 Blackmagic Design. . Blackmagic Design, DeckLink, HDLink, Workgroup Videohub, Multibridge Pro,
Multibridge Extreme, Intensity Leading the creative video revolution .
.

S-ar putea să vă placă și